Pioneer DV-S733A Operating Instructions
DVD PLAYER DV-S733A DV-47A Operating Instructions
2 En
3 En [For U.S. model] IMPORTANT NOTICE H006AEn The serial number for this equipment is located in the rear panel. Please write this serial number on your enclosed warranty card and keep it in a secure area. This is for your security.
4 En This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation, and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited. CONGRA TULA TIONS ON YOUR PURCHASE OF THIS FINE PIONEER PRODUCT . Pioneer is on the leading edge of DVD research for consumer products and this unit incorporates the latest technological developments. We are sure you will be fully satisfied with the DVD player . Thank you for your support. Please read through these operating instructions so you will know how to operate your model properly . After you have finished reading the instructions, put them away in a safe place for future reference. ⢠This player is not suitable for commercial use. On the bonnet of the unit. W ARNING: Slot and openings in the cabinet are pro- vided for ventilation and to ensure reliable operation of the product and to protect it from overheating, to pre- vent fire hazard, the openings should never be blocked and covered with items, such as newspapers, table- cloths, curtains, etc. Also do not put the apparatus on the thick carpet, bed, sofa, or fabric having a thick pile. H040 En Operating Environment H045 En Operating environment temperature and humidity: 5ðC â 35ðC ( 41ðF â 95ðF); less than 85%RH (cooling vents not blocked) Do not install in the following locations ÷ Location exposed to direct sunlight or strong artificial light ÷ Location exposed to high humidity, or poorly ventilated location
5 En T able Of Cont ents 1 Before Y ou Start F eatures ............................................................................. 6 Whatâ s in the box ............................................................ 7 Put ting the bat t eries in the r emote contr ol ............. 7 Using the remot e control ............................................. 7 Discs compatible with this pla yer .............................. 8 D VD V ideo regions ......................................................... 9 MP3 compatibilit y information ................................... 9 2 Connecting Up Easy Setup ..................................................................... 1 0 Home theat er video connections ............................. 1 1 Home theat er audio connections ............................. 1 2 3 Contr ols & Display s Disp lay ............................................................................. 1 3 Remot e control ............................................................. 1 4 Fr ont panel ..................................................................... 1 5 4 Get ting Start ed Set ting the TV Sy stem (ex cept for T aiwanese model) ................................... 1 6 Using the Setup Na vigat o r ......................................... 1 7 Playing discs ................................................................. 2 0 Naviga ting DVD disc menus ....................................... 2 2 Na vigating Super VCD/V ideo CD PBC menus ...... 2 2 Naviga ting DVD-R W discs menus ............................. 2 2 5 Playing Discs Introduction ................................................................... 2 3 Finding what y ou want on a disc .............................. 2 3 Using the Multi Dial ..................................................... 2 4 Switching camer a angles ............................................. 2 5 Switching subtitles ....................................................... 2 5 Switching audio language ........................................... 2 6 Switching audio channel (D VD-Audio) ................... 2 6 Switching audio channel (D VD-R W/Super VCD/V ideo CD/CD/MP3) ........ 2 6 Making a progr am list .................................................. 2 7 Progr amming tips .......................................................... 2 8 Using random pla y ...................................................... 2 9 Using repeat pla y ........................................................ 3 0 Bookmarking a place in a disc (LAST MEMOR Y) .......................................................... 3 1 Memorizing disc set tings (CONDITION MEMOR Y) ........................................... 3 2 Using setup menu shortcuts (FUNCTION MEMOR Y) .............................................. 3 3 Displa ying disc information ....................................... 3 4 6 Playing MP3s Playing MP3s ................................................................. 3 5 Sear ching for folders and tr acks ............................... 3 6 Using random pla y ....................................................... 3 6 Using repeat pla y ......................................................... 3 6 Displa ying MP3 information ...................................... 3 6 Using the MP3 Na vigat or ........................................... 3 7 Making a pr ogr am list of MP3 tr acks ....................... 3 8 7 D VD Setup Menu Using the Setup menu ................................................. 3 9 Setup Menu Mode ........................................................ 3 9 OSD Set tings ................................................................ 4 0 Audio set tings ............................................................... 4 0 Video set tings ................................................................ 4 7 Language set tings ......................................................... 5 2 Gener al set tings ............................................................ 5 5 8 Additional Information Handling discs ............................................................... 5 8 Storing discs .................................................................. 5 8 Discs to a void ................................................................ 5 8 Cleaning the pickup lens ............................................ 5 8 Problems with condensa tion ..................................... 5 8 Hints on installation .................................................... 5 9 Moving the pla yer ......................................................... 5 9 Glossary ......................................................................... 6 0 T r oubleshooting ............................................................ 6 2 Rese t ting the Play er .................................................... 6 5 Country Code List ....................................................... 6 6 Language code list ...................................................... 6 6 Specifications ............................................................... 6 9
6 En Befor e Y ou St ar t 1 F eatur es 5 2 5 line digital progr essive-scan component video output Compar ed t o standar d interlaced video, pr ogressiv e scan effectiv el y doubles the amount of video information fed to y our TV or monit or . The re sult is a stable, flicker -fr ee image. (Check y our TV/monitor for compat - ibilit y with this featur e.) F or the v ery highest picture qualit y , try wa tching a movie on D VD- V ideo on a progr es- siv e-scan compatible TV . What is Super VCD? (D V -S7 3 3A only) Logos: This pla y er suppor ts the IECâ s Super VCD st andar d. Compar ed to the V ideo CD st andar d, Super VCD offer s superior pictur e quality , and allow s tw o st er eo soundtr acks to be r ecorded. Super VCD also supports the widescr een size. Superlativ e audio performance with D VD-Audio, Dolb y* 1 Digit al and DT S *2 soft war e Logos: 1 R The D V -4 7A/D V -S7 3 3A deliv er s br eatht aking sound qualit y with Dolby Digital and D TS discs. T ruSurr ound *3 Logo: When used with st ereo sour ces, T ruSurround cr ea te s a r ealistic surround-sound effect using just t wo speak ers (see page 4 2 ). MP3 compatibilit y This pla yer is compatible with CD-R, CD-R W and CD-R OM discs that contain MP3 audio tr acks (see pages 9, 3 5 ). V ideo Adjust This new t ype of DNR (Digital Noise Reduction) for encoding video enable s you t o adjust the video set tings on a mor e det ailed and e xact lev el. Ther e ar e thr ee possible set tings t o choose fr om. These include: TV (CR T), PDP , and Profe ssional. This t echnology can r emember which set ting y ou'v e chosen and emplo y it at the proper time. (see page 49). Legat o PR O (Legat o Link Con ver sion PR O) The Legat o PR O digital filter r est ore s some of the high-frequency information lost in the CD and D VD r ecor ding and mast ering proce ss by upsampling from 4 4.1kHz t o 1 7 6.4kHz for CD and from 4 8kHz t o 1 9 2kHz for D VD. Legat o PR O has four set tings, including Standar d and three effect set tings. Y ou can also switch it off. (see page 45 ). Hi-Bit Hi-Bit ext ends the dynamic range of the main fr ont speaker s b y effectively incr easing the bit depth fr om 1 6-2 0 bit to 2 4 bit. This allow s the play er t o re veal grea t er det ail in lo w lev el audio (see page 4 5 ). High qualit y 2 4-bit/1 9 2kHz D A C The high specification 2 4-bit/1 9 2kHz D AC deliver s dynamic, smooth and e xpansiv e analog sound fr om CDs and D VDs. Gr aphical Setup Na vigat or Set ting up y our D VD play er is eas y using the gr aphical Setup Naviga tor . Answer the questions that appear on-scr een and the Setup Naviga t or makes the necessary audio, video and language set tings for you (see page 17 ).
7 En 1 Befor e Y ou St ar t * 1 Manufactur ed under license from Dolb y Labor at ories. âÂÂDolb yâ and the double-D s ymbol ar e tr ademarks of Dolb y Labora torie s. Confidential unpublished w orks. é 1 9 9 2- 1 99 7 Dolb y Labor at ories. All rights r e serv ed. * 2 âÂÂD TSâ and âÂÂDTS Digit al Surroundâ ar e r egist er ed tr ademarks of Digit al Theat er Sy st ems, Inc. * 3 T ruSurround and the î s ymbol are tr ademarks of SRS Labs, Inc. T ruSurround t echnology is incorpor at ed under license fr om SR S Labs, Inc. Whatâ s in the bo x Thank you for bu ying this Pioneer prod- uct. Please confirm tha t the following accessorie s ar e in the bo x when y ou open it. ⢠Remot e control ⢠AA/R6P dry cell bat t eries x2 ⢠Ster eo audio cable (red/whit e) ⢠Video cable (yello w) ⢠P o wer cable ⢠These oper ating instructions Put ting the bat t eries in the r emot e contr ol 1 Open the bat t ery compar tment co v er on the back of the remot e control. 2 Inser t t wo AA/R6P bat t erie s int o the bat - t er y compar tment following the indica tions ( ê, ÷ ) inside the compar tment. 3 Close the cov er . Not e Incorr ect use of bat t eries can re sult in hazards such as leak age and bur sting. Please observ e the following: ⢠Donâ t mix new and old ba t t eries t ogether . ⢠Donâ t use different kinds of ba t t ery to- getherâÂÂalthough the y ma y look similar , differ ent bat t eries ma y ha ve differ ent v olt ages. ⢠Make sur e that the plus and minus ends of each bat t ery match the indications in the bat tery compartment. ⢠Remo v e bat terie s from equipment that isnâÂÂt going t o be used for a month or mor e. When disposing of used bat t eries, please comply with go v ernmental r egula tions or envir onmental public instructionâ s rules tha t apply in y our country or ar ea. H0 4 8 En Using the r emot e contr ol K eep in mind the following when using the remo te contr ol: ⢠Make sur e that there ar e no obstacle s bet ween the r emot e and the remo te sensor on the unit. ⢠Use within the oper ating r ange and angle, as sho wn. ⢠Remot e oper ation ma y become unreliable if str ong sunlight or fluor escent light is shining on the unitâ s remo t e sensor . ⢠Remot e contr ollers for differ ent devices can int er fer e with each other . A v oid using r emot es for other equipment loca ted close t o this unit. ⢠Replace the bat terie s when you notice a fall off in the oper ating r ange of the r emot e. 30 30 7m (23 feet)
8 En Befor e Y ou St ar t 1 Discs compatible with this pla y er An y disc that displa ys one of the follo wing logos should pla y in this play er . Other format s, including D VD-RAM, D VD-R OM, CD-R OM (ex cept those tha t contain MP3 files) and Pho to CD will no t pla y . D VD Video compa tibilit y: ⢠Logos: ⢠Single-sided or double-sided discs ⢠Single la y er or dual la yer discs ⢠Dolb y Digit al, D TS, MPEG or Linear PCM digit al audio ⢠MPEG-2 digital video Discs ar e generall y divided int o one or more titles . T itles ma y be further subdivided int o chapters . D VD Audio compatibilit y: ⢠Logos: ⢠Single sided discs ⢠Single la y er or dual la yer discs ⢠Linear or packed PCM digit al audio ⢠Some discs ma y cont ain MPEG-2 video, and Dolb y Digital, D TS or MPEG digital audio Discs ar e generall y divided int o one or more gr oups . Groups ma y be fur ther subdivided int o tr acks . D VD-R compatibilit y (D V -S7 3 3A only): This unit can pla y D VD-R discs. Please not e the follo wing points when using the se discs: ⢠Logo: ⢠This unit can pla y D VD-R discs r ecor ded as D VD video format. D VD-R W compatibilit y (D V -S7 3 3A only): This unit can pla y D VD-R W discs. Please not e the follo wing points when using the se discs: ⢠Logo: ⢠This unit can pla y D VD-R W discs recor ded as D VD video format or D VD video recor ding format. ⢠D VD-RW discs tha t wer e recor ded with cop y- once only permission canno t be play ed. The message, âÂÂCOP Y PR O TECT PR OGRAM, UNPLA Y ABLEâ appears in the displa y during these parts of the disc. ⢠When pla ying a D VD-R W disc that w as edit ed on a D VD r ecor der , the screen ma y go moment arily black a t the edit ed point. ⢠When pla ying a D VD-R W disc that w as edit ed on a D VD r ecorder , you ma y see scenes from just befor e the edit ed point. ⢠Up to 2 0 char act ers of a title name can be displa yed. Audio CD compatibilit y: ⢠Logos: ⢠1 2cm (5in.) or 8cm (3in.) discs ⢠Linear PCM digital audio ⢠CD-Audio, CD-R* and CD-R W* format s CDs ar e divided int o tracks. *This unit can pla y CD-R and CD-R W discs recor ded in CD Audio or V ideo CD format, or with MP3 audio files. V ideo CD compatibilit y: ⢠Logo: ⢠1 2cm (5in.) or 8cm (3in.) discs ⢠MPEG-1 digital audio ⢠MPEG-1 digital video V ideo CDs are divided int o tracks . Super VCD compatibilit y: ⢠Logo: ⢠1 2cm (5in.) or 8cm (3in.) discs ⢠MPEG-1 digital audio ⢠MPEG-2 digital video Super VCDs ar e divided int o tr acks . S A CD compatibility: ⢠Logo: ⢠Single la yer , dual la yer or Hyblid la yer ⢠1 2cm (5in.) or 8cm (3in.) discs ⢠Digital audio (DSD) SA CDs ar e divided int o tracks .
9 En 1 Befor e Y ou St ar t Caution! ⢠D VD-R/R W and CD-R/R W discs r ecorded using a personal comput er or a D VD or CD r ecor der ma y not pla y if the disc is damaged or dirty , or if ther e is dirt or condensa tion on the pla yerâ s lens. ⢠If you r ecord a disc using a personal comput er , ev en if it is recor ded in a compatible format, ther e are cases in which it ma y not play because of the set tings of the application soft w ar e used t o crea te the disc. (Check with the soft ware publisher for mor e det ailed information.) ⢠Unfinalized D VD-R/R W discs cannot be pla y ed. ⢠Unfinalized CD-R/R W discs can be pla yed, but not all time information (pla ying time, e tc.) will be displa yed. ⢠F or more information on using D VD-R/R W and CD-R/R W discs, see Handling discs st ar ting on page 5 8 . D VD V ideo r egions All D VD V ideo discs carry a r egion mark on the case some where that indica t es which r egion(s) of the w orld the disc is compatible with. Y our D VD player also ha s a r egion mark, which y ou can find on the rear panel. Discs fr om incompatible regions will no t play in this pla y er . Discs mark ed ALL will pla y in an y pla yer . MP3 compatibilit y information ⢠The CD-R OM must be ISO 9 6 60 compatible. ⢠Files should be MPEG1 Audio La yer 3 format, 4 4.1 or 4 8kHz. Incompatible files will not pla y and âÂÂUNPLA Y ABLE MP3 FORMA Tâ will be displa yed. ⢠Not compatible with some variable bit -r a t e (VBR) files. ⢠VBR files ma y not show pla y times correctl y . ⢠This pla yer only play s tr acks that ar e named with the file ext ension âÂÂ.mp3â or âÂÂ.MP3â . ⢠This pla y er is not compatible with multi-session discs. If you try and pla y a multi-se ssion disc, only the first session will be pla yed. ⢠Use CD-R or CD-RW media for r ecor ding y our MP3 files. The disc must be finalized in or der t o pla y . ⢠Audio encoded at 1 2 8Kbps should sound close t o regular audio CD qualit y . Although this pla yer will pla y lower bit -r a t e MP3 tr acks, the sound qualit y becomes noticeabl y wor se at low er bit - ra te s . ⢠Only the first 8 char acter s of folder and tr ack names (ex cluding the âÂÂ.mp3â ext ension) are displa yed. ⢠This pla yer can r ecognize a maximum of 2 5 0 folders and 2 5 0 tr acks. Discs cont aining more than 2 5 0 folder s or tr acks will pla y , but only the fir st 2 5 0 folders/tr acks.
10 En Connecting Up 2 Eas y Setup This eas y setup is the minimum set of connec- tions you need to start wa tching D VD video discs. Both sound and picture ar e fed dir ectly to y our TV using the supplied audio and video cables. F or other possible connections, see pages 1 1 and 1 2 . Connecting audio and video cables Be sure t o inser t each plug fully for the best connection. The plugs and jacks ar e colour - coded t o mak e connection easier . Connecting control cable s Use a ster eo mini-plug cable (not supplied) t o connect the CONTR OL OUT of y our Pioneer amplifier/r eceiver t o the CONTR OL IN of this unit. This allo w s you to oper at e this unit with the amplifier/r eceiv erâ s r emot e control. See the instruction manual that came with your amplifier/r eceiver for mor e detailed instruc- tions. Add mor e components t o the chain by connecting the CONTR OL OUT of this unit to the CONTR OL IN of other Pioneer compo- nents. Impor tant ⢠In order t o properl y ground this pla yer , y ou must connect at lea st one cable (not including an optical cable) in addition t o the contr ol cable. ⢠If the CONTR OL IN jack on the pla yerâ s rear panel is connect ed to the CONTR OL OUT jack of another Pioneer component, point the r emot e contr ol at the o ther component t o oper at e the pla yer . Impor tant Befor e making or changing any rear panel connec- tions, make sure that all components are switched off and unplug ged fr om the wall outlet. AC IN VIDEO OUT S-VIDEO OUT D1 / D2 OPTICAL IN OUT COAXIAL SUB WOOFER CENTER SURROUND FRONT 1 P R P B Y 2 1 1 2 L L R R 2 AUDIO OUT (5.1CH) DIGITAL OUT CONTROL AUDIO OUT (2CH) COMPONENT VIDEO OUT VIDEO OUT 1 23 AC IN Connect t o a composite video input on y our TV using the supplied yello w video cable. Plug int o a st andard A C wall outle t. Connect t o a pair of st ereo audio input s on y our TV using the supplied r ed/whit e st ereo audio cable. Ther e is no D- V ideo jack on the D V -4 7A. D V -4 7A AC Inlet. D V -S7 3 3A
11 En 2 Connecting Up Home theat er video connec tions This pla yer output s video in a number of differ ent w a y s. Choose the one most suitable for your s y stem using the guide belo w . Connecting D V ideo and S- V ideo cables D V ideo (D V -S7 3 3A onl y) and S- V ideo cables will only plug in one w a y , so mak e sure the plug is correctl y lined up with the jack before inser ting. Be sur e t o fully insert for a good connection. S- Video or composit e video? S- V ideo should giv e a bet t er pictur e, so if you hav e an S- Video input, use it. S- V ideo cable s are a vailable fr om any good audio/visual dealer . Impor tant Before making or changing an y r ear panel connec- tions, mak e sur e that all components ar e switched off and unplugged from the w all outlet. AC IN VIDEO OUT S-VIDEO OUT D1 / D2 OPTICAL IN OUT COAXIAL SUB WOOFER CENTER SURROUND FRONT 1 P R P B Y 2 1 1 2 L L R R 2 AUDIO OUT (5.1CH) DIGITAL OUT CONTROL AUDIO OUT (2CH) COMPONENT VIDEO OUT VIDEO OUT 1 2 AC IN If your TV ha s a component video input, we r ecommend using it t o connect directly t o the COMPONENT VIDEO OUT of this pla yer . Use the standar d 3-jack component video ouput (D V - S7 3 3A only: y ou can also use the D1/D2 D- V ideo jack). If a component input is no t a vailable t o y ou, connect this pla yer t o your TV or A V receiv er using either the VIDEO or S- VIDEO jacks. D V -S7 3 3A D V -4 7A A C Inlet.
12 En Connecting Up 2 AC IN VIDEO OUT S-VIDEO OUT D1 / D2 OPTICAL IN OUT COAXIAL SUB WOOFER CENTER SURROUND FRONT 1 P R P B Y 2 1 1 2 L L R R 2 AUDIO OUT (5.1CH) DIGITAL OUT CONTROL AUDIO OUT (2CH) COMPONENT VIDEO OUT VIDEO OUT 1 2 3 4 AC IN COAX OPTICAL Connecting analog audio cables Be sure t o fully inser t each plug for the best connection. The plugs and jacks are colour - coded to mak e connection easier . Connecting optical cables Optical inter connects only plug in one wa y , so make sur e the plug is correctl y lined up with the jack before inser t - ing. When inser ting the plug, the pro tectiv e shut ter will open and y ou should hear it click int o position when fully inser ted. Be careful that y ou do not for ce the plug, because this could r esult in damage t o the pro tectiv e shut ter , the cable, or the unit itself . If y our amplifier has ster eo inputs only , connect them here. Connect to the coaxial or optical input of y our amplifier , if it has digit al inputs. Plug int o a standar d AC wall outlet. If your amplifier has 5.1 channel analog inputs, connect them here. Connect t o the FR ONT L (left)/R (right), SURR OUND L/R, CENTER and SUB W OOFER inputs of your amplifier . Home theat er audio connec tions This play er outputs multi-channel audio in both analog and digital form. Check the manual for your amplifier/r eceiver t o see what equipment it is compatible with (especially which digital forma tsâÂÂDolb y Digital, D TS, etc.âÂÂit can decode). Impor tant Befor e making or changing any rear panel connec- tions, make sure that all components are switched off and unplug ged fr om the wall outlet. Connecting coaxial cables Use an int er connect with a pin-t ype (also called R CA or phono) plug on each end to connect up digital coaxial-t ype jacks. Mak e sure that the plug is pushed fully home. No t e If you listen t o multichannel D VD-Audio thr ough one of the digital outputs, it will be downmix ed t o ster eo. Also, high sampling r at e D VD-Audio (1 9 2kHz or 1 7 6.4kHz) will be downsampled t o 9 6kHz, 8 8.2kHz, 4 8kHz or 4 4.1kHz, depending on the disc. Multi channel and high sampling ra te D VD-Audio is only av ailable through the analog outputs. Some D VD-Audio and all S ACD audio is output only through the analog outputs. D V -S7 3 3A There is no D- Video jack on the DV - 47 A . D V -4 7A AC Inlet.
13 En 3 Contr ols & Display s Displa y 1 VCD â Lights when a Super VCD/V ideo CD is loaded 2 GUI â Lights when an on-scr een menu is being displa yed 3 D VD â Lights when a D VD is loaded 4 D VD-A â Lights when a D VD-Audio disc is pla ying 5 Lights during r epeat pla y 6V â Lights during pla yback of the video par t of D VD discs 7 Lights during a multi-angle section of a D VD- V ideo disc 8 L, C, R, LS, S, R S, LFE â show which channels are r ecorded on the disc pla ying 5.1CH â Lights when the audio ouput is set t o 5.1 channel 9 T O T AL â Indicat es that the time sho wn in the char act er displa y is the t ot al pla ying time of the disc 10 3 â Lights when a disc is pla ying 11 8 â Light s wheh a disc is paused 1 2 LAST â Light s when the disc has a book - mark memory (see page 3 1 ) 1 3 COND. â Lights when the disc ha s had pr efer ences se t (see page 3 2 ) 1 4 REMAIN â Indicat es tha t the time sho wn in the char act er display is the r emaining pla ying time of the disc 1 5 PR OGRESSIVE â Lights when unit is outputing 5 2 5 line progr essiv e scan (non- int erlaced) video. 1 6 DO WNMIX â Lights when multi-channel D VD-Audio, Dolb y Digital, D TS or MPEG audio is do wnmixed, for e xample t o t wo channel st ereo 17 2 DIGIT AL â Lights when a disc with Dolb y Digital audio is pla ying 1 8 GRP â Indicat es that the n umber belo w in the char act er displa y is a D VD-Audio gr oup number 1 9 TITLE â Indicat es tha t the number belo w in the char act er displa y is a D VD- V ideo title number 2 0 S A CD â Lights when a Super Audio CD (SA CD) is loaded 2 1 CD â Lights when a CD is loaded 2 2 TRK â Indicat es tha t the number below in the char act er displa y is a D VD-Audio, CD, Super VCD/V ideo CD or MP3 tr ack number 2 3 CHP â Indicat es that the number belo w in the char act er display is a D VD- V ideo chapt er number 2 4 Char ac t er display 25 Lights when a disc with D TS audio is playing 26 Lights when pla ying a disc with T ruSurround switched on @ $ # 19 7 8 6 5 3 4 20 = ~! - á _ ) ( ^ % * &
14 En Contr ols & Display s 3 R emot e contr ol àDVD PLA YER SEARCH MODE STEP / SLOW RETURN PREVIOUS NEXT REV FWD P AUSE PLA Y VIDEO ADJUST DIMMER JOG MODE TOP MENU SET UP DISPLAY AUDIO SUBTITLE ANGLE OPEN / CLOSE FUNCTION MEMORY STOP PROGRAM CONDITION MEMORY LAST MEMORY REPEAT RANDOM 0 9 8 7 10 6 5 4 C 3 2 1 CLEAR MENU ENTER V .ADJ FL F .MEM JOG 8 73 A-B 4â 1 eE á ( * ! ç % ) 8 * ~ 0 ^ ⢠_ á â â ã ö = # - 9 & * * * @ 4 * 5 7 6 3 $ 2 * 1 1 MENU â page 2 2 2 â switches pla yer on or int o standb y . 3 A UDIO â page 26 4 DISPLA Y â pages 3 4, 3 6 5 SETUP â pages 1 7 , 3 9 6 MUL TI DIAL â page 2 4 7 LIGHTING â pr ess t o illuminat e but t ons 8, 9, 1 0, 1 1, 2 3, 2 5, 2 6 8 V .ADJ â V ideo adjust ( page 49 ) 9 F .MEM â Function memory (page 3 3 ) 10 3 â Pla y 11 7 â St op 12 4â â Skip 13 â R eturn 14 eE â Fr ame advance/slo w motion 1 5 Number but t ons â page s 2 1, 2 2 CONDITION MEMORY LAST MEMORY VOLUME CHANNEL TV CONTROL LAST Vol CH FUNC CH â Vol â COND. àTV ⢠ê $ ö 1 6 R ANDOM â pages 2 9, 3 6 1 7 LAST MEMOR Y â page 3 1 18 0 â Disc tr a y open/close 1 9 SUBTITLE â page 2 5 2 0 ANGLE â page 2 5 2 1 T OP MENU â page 2 2 2 2 Joy stick / ENTER but t on â page 2 2 23 F L â Pr ess t o change the displa y brightness 2 4 Jog indicat or â light s when multi dial is in jog mode ( page 2 4 ) 2 5 JOG â page 2 4 26 8 â P ause 27 1á â Scan 2 8 SEARCH MODE â page 2 3 2 9 C â Clear 3 0 PROGR AM â pages 2 7 , 3 8 3 1 REPEA T â A-B â page 3 0 3 2 CONDITION MEMOR Y â page 3 2 3 3 TV CONTR OL but t ons V OLUME â Use t o adjust the v olume. CHANNEL â Use t o select TV channel. FUNC â Pr ess FUNC t o select the TV for r emot e contr ol oper ation. 34 TV but t on â Pre ss TV t o turn the TVâ s pow er on or put in st andb y . Set ting up the Remot e Contr ol t o TV (D V -4 7A only) This most be set t o use but t ons 33 and 34 . 1. Input the Manufac tur er code. While holiding down the CLEAR but t on, input the t wo digit code fr om the table ne xt page that corr esponds t o the make of your TV . F or e xample, If y ou ha ve a Pioneer TV , pr ess and hold CLEAR, then pr ess 0, 0 on the remo t e contr ol. 2. Confirm that the TV is r esponding t o the progr ammed code. On the r emot e, pr ess the TV but t on. If the TV swithches on (or int o st andb y if it wa s on pr e viously), then you ha ve the corr ect code. If nothing happens when y ou pre ss the TV but t on, st ar t again fr om st ep 1 using a different code. ⢠Some Manufactur ers ha ve se ver al codes. T ry each one until you find the one tha t works. D V -S7 3 3A D V -4 7A
15 En 3 Contr ols & Display s F r ont panel 1 S T ANDB Y/ON 2 Disc tr a y 3 DIGIT AL D A T A OFF indicat or â Switche s the digit al output on/off . When switched off , the indicat or lights (see page 4 2 ) 4 LEGA T O PR O indicat or â page 4 5 5 FL OFF indicat or â Lights when the displa y is switched off using the FL DIMMER but t on 6 Displa y â page 1 3 0 8 7 áâ 41 3 STANDBY/ON FL OFF LEGATO PRO DIGITAL DAT A OFF à1 2~ 0 9 8 - 67 = 5 4 3 7 R emot e control sensor 8 0 â Disc tr a y open/close 9 41 â R ev er se scan/skip 10 áâ â F orwar d scan/skip 11 7 â St op 12 8 â P ause 13 3 â Pla y 1 4 FL DIMMER â Pr ess t o change the displa y brightness 0 8 7 áâ 41 3 àSTANDBY/ON FL DIMMER FL OFF 1 2~ 0 9 8 - 67 = ! 5 Code Manufacturer PIONEER 1 RCA 1 SHARP 3 ZENITH 1 SONY TOSHIBA 1 HIT ACHI 1 PHILIPS P ANASONIC 1 MITSUBISHI GOLDST AR 1 GE 1 MAGNA VOX 1 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 Code Manufacturer JVC 1 SANYO 2 RCA 2 RCA 3 RCA 4 RCA 5 SHARP 1 ZENITH 2 SANYO 1 P ANASONIC 2 GOLDST AR 2 HIT ACHI 2 HIT ACHI 3 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 Code Manufacturer TOSHIBA 2 SHARP 2 GE 2 MAGNA VOX 2 TOSHIBA 3 HIT ACHI 4 JVC 2 FUJITSU PIONEER 2 GRANDIENTE 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 Pr ese t Code List D V -4 7A D V -S7 3 3A
16 En Get ting St ar t ed 4 Se t ting the TV Sy st em (e x cept for T aiwane se model) The default set ting of this pla y er is AU T O , and unless y ou notice that the pictur e is distort ed when playing some discs, y ou should lea ve it se t to AU T O . If y ou e xperience pictur e distortion with some discs, set the TV s y st em t o match your country or r egionâ s s y st em. Doing this, how ev er , may r estrict the kinds of disc you can w atch. The t able below sho w s wha t kinds of disc are compa tible with each set ting ( AU T O , PA L and NTSC ). About MOD. (Modulation) P AL ⢠SHRINK Most models of the newl y dev eloped countdown P AL TV s yst em det ect 5 0 Hz (P AL)/6 0 Hz (NTSC) and aut omaticall y switch v ertical amplitude, r esulting in a displa y without v ertical shrinkage. ⢠If your P AL TV does no t hav e a V -Hold control, you ma y not be able t o vie w NTSC disc because the picture ma y roll. If the TV has a V -Hold contr ol, adjust it until the picture stops r olling. On some TVs, the picture ma y shrink vertically , lea ving black bands at the t op and bot t om of the scr een. This is not a malfunction; it is caused by the NTSC ] P AL conv er sion. Not e This fr ont panel is for the D V -S7 3 3A. The but tons ar e the same for the D V -4 7A. 1 Switch the pla yer int o standb y . 2 Hold down áâ then pr ess S T ANDB Y/ ON t o switch the TV sy st em. The TV sy stem changes as follow s: AU T O ] NTSC NTSC ] PA L PA L ] AU T O The display indicat es the new set ting. Not e that you ha ve t o switch the play er int o standb y before each change. áâ STANDBY/ON 0 8 7 áâ 41 3 STANDBY/ON FL OFF LEGATO PRO DIGITAL DATA OFF àDisc Output format Position of TV SYSTEM switch Type Format NTSC PAL AUTO DVD NTSC NTSC MOD. PAL NTSC PAL PAL PAL Video CD NTSC NTSC MOD. PAL NTSC PAL PAL PAL NTSC Super VCD NTSC NTSC MOD. PAL NTSC PAL PAL PAL SACD NTSC PAL NTSC or PAL CD, No disc NTSC PAL NTSC or PAL
17 En 4 Get ting St ar t ed àDVD PLA YER SET UP STOP ENTER 7 Using the Setup Na vigat or Befor e pla ying an y discs, w e strongly r ecommend using the Setup Na viga t or . This make s all the basic D VD play er set tings for y ou. 1 Pre ss S T ANDB Y/ON t o switch on. Also turn on your TV and mak e sur e that it is set t o the correct video input. ⢠The but t on on the remo te switche s the pla yer be t ween st andby and on. ⢠If a disc thatâ s alread y loaded start s to pla y , pre ss 7 t o st op it. 2 Pre ss SETUP . The Setup Na vigator on-scr een display (OSD) appear s: General A2 V2 Language Audio1 Video1 Exit Move Select Setup using the Setup Navigator Setup Navigator Setup Navigator Start Auto Start Off SETUP ENTER Navigat e all of the following OSDs using the se contr ols: Jo y stick up/down â cur sor up/do wn ENTER â select the highlight ed menu option Jo y stick left â go back t o the pre vious question. The contr ol possibilities for the current OSD ar e shown at the bot t om of each scr een. 3 Selec t âÂÂStar tâ . General A2 V2 Language Audio1 Video1 Exit Move Select Setup using the Setup Navigator Setup Navigator Setup Navigator Start Auto Start Off SETUP ENTER R emember Pr ess ENTER t o select an option. ⢠If you decide y ou donâ t want t o use the Setup Na vigat or , select Aut o Start Off here inst ead. Not e This r emot e is for the D V - S7 3 3A. The but tons ar e the same for the D V -4 7A.
18 En Get ting St ar t ed 4 7 If you select ed 5.1 Channel audio con- nec tions in st ep 6, confirm which speak - er s ar e connec t ed t o your amplifier . General A2 V2 Language Audio1 Video1 Exit Move Select Center speaker is connected to an amplifier Setup Navigator Center Speaker Amp Connection Present Dolby Digital/DTS Not Present SETUP ENTER General A2 V2 Language Audio1 Video1 Exit Move Select Surround speakers are connected to an amplifier Setup Navigator Surround Speakers Amp Connection Present Dolby Digital/DTS Not Present SETUP ENTER General A2 V2 Language Audio1 Video1 Exit Move Select Sub â woofer is connected to an amplifier Setup Navigator SubâÂÂwoofer Amp Connection Present Dolby Digital/DTS Not Present SETUP ENTER 8 Confirm the digital audio forma ts your amplifier is compatible with (if y ou made a digit al connec tion). General A2 V2 Language Audio1 Video1 Exit Move Select Compatible with Dolby Digital Setup Navigator Digital Jack Amp Connection Dolby Digital Dolby Digital/DTS Dolby Digital/MPEG Dolby D/DTS/MPEG PCM Not Connected SETUP ENTER ⢠All options (e xcep t Not Connec t ed ) assume PCM compatibilit y . The PCM option means only compatible with PCM. ⢠More information on the se audio formats is a vailable in the Glossar y on page 60 . ⢠Consult the manual that came with y our amplifier if youâÂÂr e unsur e about compatibilit y with an y of these forma ts. 4 Choose an OSD menu language. General A2 V2 Language Audio1 Video1 Exit Move Select Select the On Screen Language Setup Navigator OSD Language Language English fran çais Deutsch Italiano Espa ñol SETUP ENTER ⢠T aiw anese model: English 5 Selec t the t ype of TV y ou hav e. General A2 V2 Language Audio1 Video1 Exit Move Select Widescreen TV 16:9 aspect ratio Setup Navigator TV T ype TV Connection Widescreen(16:9) Standard(4:3) SETUP ENTER ⢠See Aspect ratio in the Glossar y on page 60 if y ouâÂÂr e unsur e of the difference bet ween widescr een and standar d TVs. 6 Selec t the t ype of analog audio connec- tions y ou made t o your amplifier/ r eceiv er . General A2 V2 Language Audio1 Video1 Exit Move Select 2channel jacks for L/R Setup Navigator Analog Jacks Amp Connection 2 Channel Dolby Digital/DTS 5.1Channel Not Connected SETUP ENTER ⢠If you connect ed the audio output dir ectly t o y our TV follo wing the Easy setup on page 1 0 , choose 2 Channel.
19 En 4 Get ting St ar t ed 9 Confirm whether y our amplifier is compatible with 96kHz audio. General A2 V2 Language Audio1 Video1 Exit Move Select Digital jack not compatible with 96kHz Setup Navigator 96kHz PCM Audio Amp Connection No Ye s Don't Know SETUP ENTER ⢠Y ou wonâÂÂt see this screen if y ou selected Not Connect ed in st ep 8. ⢠Selecting Donâ t Know has the same effect a s selecting No : an y 9 6kHz audio will be downsampled t o 4 8kHz. This is a more compatible sampling fr equency . See Sampling frequenc y in the Glossar y on page 6 1 for mor e on this. 1 0 Selec t âÂÂSa v e Changesâ t o mak e the set tings. General A2 V2 Language Audio1 Video1 Exit Move Select Changes are saved Setup Navigator Exit Setup Navigator Save Changes Delete Changes Start Again SETUP ENTER 1 1 Press SETUP t o exit. ⢠Y ou may no t need t o do this step, depending on when y ou use the Setup Na vigat or . Congr atulations, se t up is complet e! If y ou want t o use the Setup Na vigat or again at an y time, it is av ailable fr om the Gener al menu. Also, each individual se t ting can be changed using the appr opriat e menu optionâ chapt er 7 explains all men u options in de tail.
20 En Get ting St ar t ed 4 Pla ying discs The basic pla yback controls for pla ying discs ar e cov ered her e. F ur ther functions ar e det ailed in the ne xt chap ter . Not e Thr oughout this manual, the t erm âÂÂD VDâ means D VD- V ideo, D VD-Audio and D VD-R/R W . If a function is specific t o a par ticu- lar kind of D VD disc, it is specified. 1 Switch the play er on. If y ouâÂÂr e pla ying a D VD or Super VCD/V ideo CD, also turn on your TV and mak e sure tha t it is set t o the correct video input. 2 Pre ss 0 t o open the disc tr a y . 3 Load a disc. Load a disc with the label side facing up, using the disc tr ay guide t o align the disc (if y ouâÂÂr e loading a double-sided D VD disc, load it with the side y ou w ant t o play face do wn). 4 Pre ss 3 t o start playback. If y ouâÂÂre pla ying a D VD or Super VCD/Video CD, a men u ma y appear . See page 2 2 for how t o na vigat e the se. àDVD PLA YER PREVIOUS NEXT REV FWD P AUSE PLA Y OPEN / CLOSE STOP 8 73 4â 1 á 0 9 8 7 10 6 5 4 3 2 1 Not e This r emot e is for the D V - S7 3 3A. The but tons ar e the same for the D V -4 7A.
21 En 4 Get ting St ar t ed Basic pla yback contr ols But t on What it does 3 St arts pla yback. D VD and Super VCD/V ideo CD: if the displa y show s RESUME, pla yback st arts fr om the resume point. 8 P auses a disc thatâ s pla ying, or re starts a paused disc. 7 St ops pla yback. D VD and Super VCD/V ideo CD: Displa y show s RESUME. Pr ess 7 again t o cancel the r esume function. 1 1. Pr ess & hold for fast r ev erse scanning. R elease t o resume normal pla yback. 2. Pr ess once t o start r e v erse scannning. Pr ess again t o increa se the scan speed. (S A CD, CD and Super VCD/V ideo CD ha ve t wo scan speeds; D VD has thr ee.) Pr ess 3 t o re sume normal pla yback. á 1. Pr ess & hold for fast forw ard scanning. R elease t o resume normal pla yback. 2. Pr ess once t o start forw ar d scannning. Pr ess again t o increa se the scan speed. (S A CD, CD and Super VCD/V ideo CD ha ve t wo scan speeds; D VD has thr ee.) Pr ess 3 t o re sume normal pla yback. 4 Skips t o the st art of the curr ent tr ack or chapt er , then t o previous tr acks/ chapt ers. â Skips t o the next tr ack or chapt er . Number s 1. If the disc is st opped, pla yback st arts from the select ed title/group (D VD) or tr ack number (SA CD/CD/ Super VCD/V ideo CD). 2. If the disc is pla ying, pla yback jumps t o the start of the select ed chapt er or tr ack (within the current gr oup for D VD-Audio). 1 0 Selects titles/gr oups/chapt er s/tr acks 1 0 and over . (F or e xample, for 2 4, pr ess 1 0 , 1 0 , 4 .) D VD- Video, D VD-R/R W and Super VCD/ V ideo CD only: But t on What it does E 1. While a disc is pla ying, press and hold t o start slow -motion forwar d scanning. Pr ess again t o increa se the scanning speed fr om 1 / 16 , 1 / 8, 1 / 4 t o 1 / 2 normal pla y speed. Pre ss 3 to r esume normal pla yback. 2. While a disc is pla ying, press once t o pause; adv ance a single fr ame with each subsequent pr ess. Pr ess 3 t o r esume normal pla yback. F or D VD-Audio discs fea turing br ow sable picture s ( page 2 3 ), press t o vie w the next pictur e. D VD- Video and D VD-R/R W only: But ton What it doe s e 1. While a disc is pla ying, press and hold t o start slow -motion r ev erse scanning. Pr ess again t o increa se the scanning speed fr om 1 / 16 , 1 / 8, 1 / 4 t o 1 / 2 normal pla y speed. Pre ss 3 to r esume normal pla yback. 2. While a disc is pla ying, press once t o pause; r ever se a single fr ame with each subsequent pr ess. Pr ess 3 t o r esume normal pla yback. F or D VD-Audio discs fea turing br ow sable picture s ( page 2 3 ), press t o vie w the previous pictur e. Impor t ant While using the D VD playback contr ols, y ou ma y see the or mark displa y ed on-scr een. ⢠means that the oper ation is not allo w ed b y the pla yer . ⢠means that the oper ation is no t allo wed b y the disc.
22 En Get ting St ar t ed 4 Na vigating D VD disc menus Man y D VD discs contain menus. Sometime s these ar e display ed automa tically when y ou start playback; o thers only appear when y ou pr ess MENU or T OP MENU . F or D VD Audio discs, use T OP MENU . Not e Some D VD-Audio discs featur e a âÂÂbonus groupâ . T o access this gr oup you ha ve to input a pa ssw ord, which y ou can find on the discâ s packaging. See page 5 7 for more information. But ton What it doe s T OP MENU Displa ys the âÂÂt op menuâ of a D VD discâ this v aries with the disc. MENU Displa ys a D VD disc menuâÂÂthis varies with the disc and ma y be the same as the âÂÂt op menuâ . RETURN R eturns t o the pre viously displa yed menu scr een. On some D VD-Audio discs featuring br ow sable picture s, pr ess t o displa y the br ow ser screen. Jo y stick Mov es the cursor ar ound the screen. ENTER Selects the curr ent menu option. Number s Selects a number ed menu option (some discs only). 1 0 Selects a number ed menu option 1 0 and o v er . (F or ex ample, for 2 4, press 1 0 , 1 0 , 4 .) (Some discs only .) Na vigating Super VCD/V ideo CD PBC menus Some Super VCDs/V ideo CDs ha v e menus fr om which you can choose wha t you w ant t o w atch. These ar e called PBC (Pla yback contr ol) menus. Y ou can play a PBC Super VCDs/V ideo CDs without ha ving t o naviga t e the PBC menu b y starting playback using a number but ton t o select a tr ack, ra ther than the 3 but ton. But t on What it does RETURN Displa ys the PBC men u. Number s Selects a n umbered men u option. 1 0 Selects a number ed menu option 1 0 and o ver . (F or example, for 2 4, pre ss 1 0 , 1 0 , 4 .) 4 Displa ys the pr evious menu page (if ther e is one). â Displa ys the ne xt menu page (if there is one). Na vigating D VD-R W discs menus 1 Pre ss MENU. 2 Mov e the Joy stick left/right but t ons to t og gle bet ween Original and Pla y List. The Original scr een sho ws the cont ents of the disc as r ecorded. The Pla y List screen sho ws the cont ents in the or der progr ammed by the per son who r ecor ded the disc (not all D VD- R W discs contain a Pla y List ). ⢠Y ou canâ t switch bet w een Original and Pla y List while a disc is pla ying. 3 Mov e the Joy stick up/do wn but t ons t o highlight a menu it em in the list, then pr ess ENTER t o selec t it. ⢠Use the 4 and â t o see the pr e vious/ ne xt page. ⢠T o pr evie w the first fr ame of the highlighted menu it em, mov e the Jo ystick right . ⢠T o displa y this disc menu during pla yback, pr ess MENU.
23 En 5 Pla ying Discs àDVD PLA YER PLA Y 3 SEARCH MODE 0 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Intr oduc tion ⢠Man y of the functions co ver ed in this chapt er apply t o D VD discs, Super VCDs/Video CDs, S ACDs and CDs, although the e xact oper ation of some varie s slightly with the kind of disc loaded. ⢠When pla ying D VD discs, if the or icon appear s on-scr een when y ou try and use a particular function, either the pla y er or the disc doesnâÂÂt allow the use of that function. ⢠When pla ying Super VCDs/V ideo CDs, some of the functions ar e not av ailable in PBC mode. If y ou w ant t o use them, start the disc playing using a n umber but t on t o select a tr ack. Finding wha t you w ant on a disc Y ou can directl y access an y point on a disc using one of the sear ch modes. Use the se sear ch modes while a disc is pla ying, or when itâ s stopped. Pla yback jumps to the point specified. 1 Pre ss SEAR CH MODE r epeat edly t o choose bet w een: ⢠Title/Gr oup search (D VD only) ⢠Chapt er/T rack sear ch ⢠Page search (D VD-Audio discs with bro wsable pictur es only) ⢠Time sear ch (D VD-V ideo and Super VCD/Video CD onl y) ⢠Fr ame & Time sear ch (D VD- V ideo only) (The F r ame Search op tion in the V ideo1 menu must be On t o use this) ( page 4 7 ) ⢠Off 2 Ent er the title/chapt er/group/tr ack number or time (minut es & seconds). F or example, for title 4, pr ess 4. F or chapter/tr ack 1 2, pre ss 1 , 2 . F or 4 5 minute s into the disc, pr ess 4, 5, 0, 0 . 3 Pre ss 3 t o start/re star t pla yback. Not e This remo te is for the D V - S7 3 3A. The but tons ar e the same for the D V -4 7A.
24 En Pla ying Discs 5 Using the Multi Dial Y ou can use the Multi Dial to contr ol fast and slo w motion scanning and fr ame adv ance of D VD- Video, D VD-R/R W and V ideo CDs. When scanning, no audio is output, e v en when the scanning speed is 1/1 (normal pla yback speed). ⢠T o start scanning playback a t 1/1 6 speed, turn the MUL TI DIAL (clockwise for forwar d; anticlockwise for re v er se) during pla yback. ⢠T urn the MUL TI DIAL in the same direction t o incr ea se the scan speedâÂÂthe speed is indicat ed at the t op left of the screen. ⢠T urn in the opposit e direction t o slow the scan speed/re ver se direction. ⢠T o start high-speed scanning, turn the MUL TI DIAL quickly (clockwise for forwar d; anticlockwise for re v er se) during pla yback. ⢠Change the speed/direction in the same w a y as abo ve. ⢠T o r esume normal pla yback, pr ess 3 . ⢠T o start manual scanning, pre ss JOG MODE, then use the MUL TI DIAL t o adv ance frame s in either dir ection. T o switch off jog mode, pr ess JOG MODE again. The pictur e remains paused until y ou r est art playback. ⢠T o r esume normal pla yback, pr ess 3 . Not e Y ou can scan V ideo CDs in the same wa y as D VD- V ideo discs (see abo ve). Ho we v er , re v erse slow -motion scanning is no t possible, and ther e are just t w o fast scanning speeds. Not e P AL display s 2 5 frame s per second, number ed 0-2 4. NTSC displa y s 3 0 fr ames per second, number ed 0-2 9. The Fr ame Search op tion in the V ideo menu must be On t o use this. Pr ess DISPLA Y while a still pictur e is displa y ed t o see the fr ame number . Depending on the disc, it ma y not be possible t o sear ch for a specific fr ame. Also, when using fr ame advance, forwar d st ep or re ver se step. Each fr ame may not be appear in e xact order when st epping thr ough them. The number assigned t o a specific fr ame may be differ ent when st epping thr ough the fr ames in forwar d or r ev erse mode.
25 En 5 Pla ying Discs àDVD PLA YER SUBTITLE ANGLE C CLEAR Switching camer a angles Some D VD V ideo discs featur e scenes sho t fr om t wo or more angle sâÂÂcheck the disc box for de tails: it should be mark ed with a icon if it contains multi-angle scene s. ⢠T o switch the camera angle, pr ess ANGLE. If the disc wa s paused, pla yback starts again with the ne w angle. ⢠T o hide the TV angle indicat or , choose Angle Indicat or > Off fr om the V ideo 2 menu (see page 5 1 ). Switching subtitle s Man y D VD Video discs ha ve subtitle s in one or more languagesâÂÂthe disc bo x will usually tell y ou which subtitle languages ar e av ailable. Y ou can switch subtitle language an ytime during pla yback. ⢠T o display/switch the subtitle language, pr ess SUBTITLE r epeat edly . The curr ent subtitle language is sho wn on-scr een. ⢠T o switch off subtitles, pr ess SUBTITLE then CLEAR. ⢠T o set subtitle pr efer ences, see page 5 3. Not e This r emot e is for the D V - S7 3 3A. The but tons ar e the same for the D V -4 7A.
26 En Pla ying Discs 5 Switching audio language When playing a D VD Video disc recor ded with dialog in tw o or mor e languages, you can switch audio language an ytime during pla yback. ⢠T o display/switch the audio language, pr ess A UDIO r epeat edly . The current audio language is shown on-scr een. ⢠T o set audio language prefer ences, see page 5 2. Switching audio channel Depending on the disc, you ma y be able to switch channels, when playing D VD-Audio discsâÂÂsee the disc bo x for det ails. ⢠T o switch the audio channel, pr ess A UDIO repea t edly . Switching audio channel On Super VCDs/V ideo CDs, CDs and MP3s you can switch bet ween st ereo, just the left channel or just the right channel. On D VD-R W discs that hav e bo th L and R audio channel, you can switch bet ween the L, R, or a mix of both. ⢠T o switch the audio channel, pr ess A UDIO repea t edly . The curr ent pla yback channel(s) ar e indicat ed on-screen. àDVD PLA YER AUDIO Not e This r emot e is for the D V - S7 3 3A. The but ton is the same for the D V -4 7A.
27 En 5 Pla ying Discs àDVD PLA YER P AUSE STOP PROGRAM 0 9 8 7 10 6 5 4 C 3 2 1 CLEAR ENTER 8 7 PLA Y 3 Making a pr ogr am list This featur e lets y ou progr am the play or der of title s/groups/ chapt ers/tr acks on a disc. Y ou mak e a progr am list via an on- screen displa y , using the cur sor but tons to na vigat e and the number but tons t o ent er titles/chapt ers/tr acks. Not e that progr ammed playback is not av ailable for D VD-R Ws. 1 Pr e ss PR OGRAM. Exit Move Play Current: T itle T itle Program Memory â Off 7 1 Chapter (Chapter 1~18) 1 Program Chapter Program T itle PROGRAM ENTER Exit Move Play Current: T itle Program Memory â Off 2(/20) Program Chapter Program T itle PROGRAM ENTER 2 Mo ve the Jo y stick left/right t o selec t âÂÂProgr am Chapt erâ or âÂÂPr ogr am T itleâ . 3 Mo ve the Joy stick down t o the progr am list windo w . If you select ed Progr am Chapt er , move the Jo ystick up and enter a title number (all the progr ammed chapt ers will come from this title). 4 Ent er the title/chapt er numbers for your pr ogr am list. F or titles/chapt ers 1âÂÂ9, use the corre sponding number but t ons. F or 1 0 and over , use the 1 0 but ton ( 1 0 , 1 0 , 4 for 2 4, etc.) ⢠Y ou can pr ogr am a pause instead of a title/chapt er: press 8 instead of ent ering a number in the pr ogr am list. (A pause can't be the first or last st ep in the list.) ⢠A pr ogr am list can contain up to 2 4 st eps. 5 If you w ant t o sa v e the pr ogram list, mo v e the Jo ystick do wn t o âÂÂPr ogr am Memor yâ and set it t o âÂÂOnâ . Exit Move Current: T itle T itle Program Memory On 7 1 09 07 18 Chapter (Chapter 1~18) 1 Program Chapter Program T itle Off PROGRAM ENTER Select If you do this, the pr ogr am list is automaticall y recalled when y ou next load the disc. ⢠Y ou can sav e pr ogr am lists for up t o 2 4 discs. ⢠After set ting t o On, mov e the cur sor back up to the progr am list windo w . Not e This remo te is for the D V - S7 3 3A. The but tons ar e the same for the D V -4 7A.
28 En Pla ying Discs 5 6 Pr ess ENTER or 3 t o st ar t playback immedi- at ely , or PR OGRAM t o e xit if you want t o start playback lat er . During progr am pla y , y ou may occasionally see the st art of a chapt er that wa s not progr ammed when the chapt er number changes. This is not a malfunc- tion. Not e Y ou canâÂÂt progr am tr ack numbers ov er 1 00 on S A CDs. F or Super VCDs/V ideo CDs that featur e PBC, mak e sur e that the disc is st opped befor e you st ar t. 1 Pr ess PR OGR AM. Exit Move Play Current: T rack T otal T ime 1(/10) 0.00 Program T rack PROGRAM ENTER 2 Ent er the tr ack numbers for your pr ogr am list. F or tr acks 1âÂÂ9, use the corr esponding number but tons. F or 1 0 and ov er , use the 1 0 but t on ( 1 0 , 1 0 , 4 for 2 4, etc.) ⢠Y ou can progr am a pause instead of a tr ack/ chapt er: pre ss 8 instead of ent ering a number in the progr am list. (A pause can't be the first or last st ep in the list.) ⢠A pr ogr am list can contain up to 2 4 steps. 3 Pr ess ENTER or 3 t o st ar t playback immedi- at ely , or PR OGRAM t o e xit if you want t o start playback lat er . ⢠Y ou can't st art pla yback lat er with a PBC Super VCD/V ideo CD; press ENTER or 3 t o start. Pr ogr amming tips ⢠T o view the progr am list pr ess PROGR AM . ⢠T o delet e a step in the progr am list, position the cursor on the title/gr oup/ chapt er/track and pr ess CLEAR . ⢠T o inser t a step int o the progr am list, position the cur sor wher e you want the new step t o appear , then ent er the title/gr oup/ chapt er/track number . All the following st eps mov e up one. ⢠T o add the currently pla ying title/gr oup/ chapt er/track t o the progr am list, pre ss and hold PR OGRAM for about a second. If there is no current pr ogr am list, a new one is crea ted (for D VD, if the last list cr eated w as a title list then the a title progr am list is crea ted, otherwise a chapt er pr ogr am list is crea t ed). ⢠T o delet e the progr am list, stop pla yback (pr ess 7 ), then pr ess CLEAR . The progr am list is also er ased when you r emo ve the disc from the pla yer or turn the po wer off ( standb y ). ⢠T o delet e a memorized D VD progr am list, load the D VD, pre ss PR OGRAM , then change the Pr ogr am Memor y option to Off . Pre ss ENTER to confirm.
29 En 5 Pla ying Discs Using r andom pla y Use the r andom play function t o pla y titles/chapt er s/groups/ tr acks (D VD) or tr acks (CD or Super VCD/Video CD) in a r andom order . Y ou canâ t use r andom play with D VD-R W discs, S ACD or Super VCD/V ideo CD playing in PBC mode. 1 Pr ess R ANDOM r epeat edly t o selec t a r andom play mode. The mode is display ed on-screen: ⢠Random Chapt er/T rack (from within the current title) ⢠Random T itle/Group ⢠Random (r andom pla y starts immediatel y) 2 D VD only: Pre ss ENTER or 3 t o start r andom play . ⢠T o st op the disc and cancel r andom pla yback, press 7 . ⢠T o cancel r andom pla yback without stopping pla yback, pre ss CLEAR . The rest of the disc pla ys out. T ip ⢠During r andom pla y , the 4 and â but tons function a lit tle differentl y to normal: 4 re turns t o the beginning of the curr ent tr ack/chapt er/. Y ou can't go back further than this. â selects another tr ack/chapter at r andom from those remaining. ⢠Y ou can't use r andom pla y t ogether with progr am or repea t pla y . àDVD PLA YER PREVIOUS NEXT STOP RANDOM C CLEAR ENTER 7 4â Not e This r emot e is for the D V - S7 3 3A. The but tons ar e the same for the D V -4 7A.
30 En Pla ying Discs 5 àDVD PLA YER PLA Y REPEA T C CLEAR 3 A-B Using repea t play Y ou can set the pla y er to r epea t individual tr acks on CDs or Super VCDs/Video-CDs, chapt er s/tracks or titles/gr oup on D VD discs, or the whole disc. It's also possible t o loop a section of a disc. Y ou can use the repea t toge ther with the pr ogr amming mode t o repea t the tr acks/chapt ers in the progr am list (see page 2 7 for how t o mak e a progr am list). Y ou canâ t use an y r epeat mode or looped pla y with a Super VCD/V ideo CD pla ying in PBC mode. Looped playback is no t possible with SA CD. Not e ⢠Y ou canâÂÂt use repeat and r andom pla y at the same time. ⢠If you switch camer a angle during repea t play , repea t pla y is cancelled. 1 Pre ss REPEA T during pla yback t o selec t a repea t mode. Each press switches the r epeat mode: ⢠Repea t Chapt er/T rack ⢠Repea t Title/Gr oup ⢠Repea t Off ⢠Repea t T r ack ⢠Repea t All ⢠Repea t Off 2 T o re sume normal pla yback, pre ss CLEAR. T ip Y ou can use r epeat pla y with progr am play . During pr ogr am play , pre ss REPEA T . Looping a sec tion of a disc 1 Pre ss REPEA T A-B once at the star t of the sec tion you w ant t o r epeat, then again at the end. Playback immediat ely jumps back t o the star t point and pla y s the loop r ound and round. ⢠On a D VD disc, the start and end points of the loop must be in the same title/group. 2 T o re sume normal pla yback, pre ss CLEAR. ⢠Y ou can also r epeat a section of a disc just once b y pre ssing 3 t o mark the end point (inst ead of A-B). Not e This r emot e is for the D V - S7 3 3A. The but tons ar e the same for the D V -4 7A.
31 En 5 Pla ying Discs àDVD PLA YER LAST MEMORY C CLEAR STOP 7 Bookmarking a place in a disc (LAS T MEMOR Y) If y ou wa tch only part of a D VD V ideo disc with the inten- tion of picking up lat er where y ou left off, y ou can book - mark the place then r esume pla yback at a lat er dat e without having t o manually sear ch for the right place. Y ou can use this feature for up t o five discs (aft er that the oldest bookmark is dele ted t o mak e space for a ne w one). Bookmarking also works with Super VCDs/V ideo CDs, but for one disc only , and y ou must leav e the disc in the pla yerâÂÂopening the disc tr ay er ases the memory . Last Memory ma y not w ork reliabl y with some PBC Super VCDs/V ideo CDs. Y ou canâ t use bookmarking with D VD-Audio and D VD-R W discs. Depending on the disc, you ma y not be able to use bookmarking with D VD- Video or Super VCD/V ideo CD discs. ⢠At the point fr om which you w ant t o re sume playback ne xt time, pr ess LAS T MEMOR Y . Pr ess 7 if y ou w ant t o stop pla yback here. ⢠T o re sume playback, load the disc and pr ess LAS T MEMOR Y . If the disc starts aut o playback, st op it fir st. ⢠T o clear the bookmark for the disc loaded, press LAS T MEMOR Y then CLEAR while âÂÂLast Memoryâ is display ed on-scr een. D V -S7 3 3A D V -4 7A (U.S. model) LAST MEMORY LAST
32 En Pla ying Discs 5 àDVD PLA YER CONDITION MEMORY C CLEAR Memorizing disc set tings (CONDITION MEMOR Y) If you ha ve a par ticular set of prefer ences for a disc, y ou can memorize them using the Condition Memory function. Once memorized, your set tings will be recalled aut omaticall y whenev er you load that disc. The play er can st ore set tings for 1 5 discs; after this, memorizing ano ther replace s the oldest one st ored. Condition Memory does not work with D VD-Audio and D VD-R W discs. The set tings memorized ar e: ⢠Multi-Angle ( page 2 5 ) ⢠Subtitle Language ( page 2 5 ) ⢠Audio Language ( page 2 6 ) ⢠On Scr een Display ( page 40 ) ⢠Video Adjust ( page 49) ⢠P arent al Lock lev el ( page 5 5 ) ⢠T o memorize set tings for the current disc, pr ess CONDITION MEMOR Y during playback. ⢠T o recall memorized set tings, just load the disc. The display sho ws COND_MEM and âÂÂCondition Memoryâ appears on- screen. ⢠T o clear memorized set tings, load the disc and pr ess CLEAR while âÂÂCondition Memor yâ is display ed on-scr een. D V -S7 3 3A D V -4 7A (U.S. model) CONDITION MEMORY COND.
33 En 5 Pla ying Discs Using setup menu shortcuts (FUNCTION MEMOR Y) Y ou can creat e a shor tcut menu of up t o 5 setup menu it ems that y ou often acce ss. Rather than na vigat e through the whole setup menu each time y ou want t o alter a se t - ting, y ou can access the se t ting str aight fr om the shortcut. T o add a menu it em t o the shor tcut list: 1 Pr ess SETUP . 2 Selec t the menu it em you w ant t o add. 3 Pr ess FUNCTION MEMOR Y . The item is mark ed FM . (Some it ems in the Setup menu canno t be added to the shortcut menu. In this ca se, the mark or â i This it em cannot be r egist ered in the function memor yâ is display ed on-screen.) 4 R epeat st eps 2 and 3 t o add up t o five it ems t o the shor tcut menu. 5 Pr ess SETUP t o exit. T o use the shor tcut menu: 1 Pr ess FUNCTION MEMOR Y . On Screen Display Digital Out Function Memory 2 Selec t the it em you w ant using the Joy stick and pr ess ENTER. 3 The Setup menu opens on the it em y ou selec t ed. Select from the op tions in the normal wa y . 4 Pr ess SETUP t o exit. T o dele t e an it em fr om the shor tcut menu: 1 Pr ess SETUP . 2 Selec t the menu it em you w ant t o delet e from the short - cut menu. It should be mark ed FM . 3 Pr ess FUNCTION MEMOR Y t o clear the FM mark. 4 Pr ess SETUP t o exit. àDVD PLA YER ENTER FUNCTION MEMORY F .MEM SET UP Not e This remo te is for the D V - S7 3 3A. The but tons ar e the same for the D V -4 7A.
34 En Pla ying Discs 5 àDVD PLA YER DISPLA Y Displa ying disc information V arious track, chap ter and title information, a s w ell as the video tr ansmission ra t e for D VD discs, can be display ed on- screen while a disc is pla ying, or while itâ s stopped. ⢠T o sho w/switch the information display ed, pre ss DIS- PLA Y . When a disc is playing, the informa tion appear s at the t op of the screen. K eep pre ssing DISPLA Y to change the displa yed informa- tion. Example: Play T rack 2âÂÂ1 0.24 6.29 âÂÂ6.05/ DVD-Audio display Play T r . Rate : 3 9.2 DVD display sho wing the data transmission r ate When a disc is stopped, all title/gr oup/chapt er , or tr ack informa- tion for the disc loaded appear s on-scr een. Pre ss DISPLA Y again to e xit the scr een. Not e Information for Super VCD is not displa yed. DISPLA Y Exit T itle Chapter T itle Chapter 01 06 07 08 09 10 02 03 04 05 1 ~ 30 1 ~ 21 1 ~ 46 1 ~ 12 1 ~ 8 1 ~ 10 1 ~ 13 1 ~ 5 1 ~ 4 1 ~ 8 1/2 Information: DVD Title s and number of chapt ers in each title DISPLA Y T otal time 72 . 04 T rack Ti m e Tr a c k Ti m e 01 06 07 08 09 10 02 03 04 05 5 . 23 4 . 55 6 . 13 5 . 45 5 . 10 6 . 51 3 . 18 6 . 50 4 . 16 3 . 22 1/2 Information: Compact Disc Exit T otal pla ying time of disc, tr acks and tr ack times DISPLA Y Disc T itle Original Play List 1 ~ 6 1 ~ 3 Information: DVD-RW Exit disc name (if progr ammed) Disc name (if progr ammed) and number of titles in the Original recor ding and the Play List DISPLA Y Exit Group T rack Group T rack 01 06 07 08 09 02 03 04 05 1 ~ 1 1 ~ 1 1 ~ 1 1 ~ 1 1 ~ 1 1 ~ 1 1 ~ 1 1 ~ 1 1 ~ 4 1/1 Information: DVD Groups and number of tr acks in each group DISPLA Y T otal time 72 . 04 T rack Ti m e T rack Ti m e 001 006 007 008 009 010 002 003 004 005 5 . 23 4 . 55 6 . 13 5 . 45 5 . 10 6 . 51 3 . 18 6 . 50 4 . 16 3 . 22 1/2 Information: SACD 2ch Area Exit T otal p la y in g time of disc, tr acks and tr ack times Not e This r emot e is for the D V - S7 3 3A. The but ton is the same for the D V -4 7A.
35 En 6 Pla ying MP3s àDVD PLA YER PREVIOUS NEXT REV FWD P AUSE PLA Y OPEN / CLOSE STOP 8 73 4â 1 á 0 9 8 7 10 6 5 4 3 2 1 Pla ying MP3s This pla y er can play MP3 files on a CD-R OM disc. MP3 is a popular audio format on comput ers and the Int ernet because file sizes ar e small (compared t o uncompr essed CD audio), while the sound qualit y r emains surprisingly good. 1 Switch the play er on. 2 Pre ss 0 t o open the disc tr a y . 3 Load a CD-R OM containing MP3 tr acks 4 Pre ss 3 t o start playing the fir st MP3 tr ack on the disc. ⢠It ma y tak e a few seconds for the pla yer t o locat e the tr ack on the disc, depending on the comple xit y of the file structur e. During this time, âÂÂPlease w ait a momentâ is displa yed. ⢠The tr ack name is displa y ed for the first fiv e seconds of the tr ack. Aft er the selected tr ack has pla y ed out, the ne xt tr ack recor ded on the disc st arts pla ying. ⢠Press 8 while a tr ack is pla ying to pause. Pr ess again t o re st art pla yback. ⢠Press 4 / â t o skip t o the pre vious/ne xt tr ack on the disc. ⢠Press and hold 1 / á t o scan backwar d/forwar d. ⢠Press 7 t o stop pla yback. Excep t in progr am or r andom pla y , the pla yer r emember s the curr ent folder a s long as the disc remains in the pla yer . Pr ess 3 to r est art pla yback from the fir st tr ack of that folder . Not e This r emot e is for the D V - S7 3 3A. The but tons ar e the same for the D V -4 7A.
36 En Pla ying MP3s 6 Sear ching for folders and tr acks 1 Use the SEAR CH MODE t o choose bet ween: ⢠F older search ⢠T r ack sear ch ⢠Off 2 Ent er the folder/track number . F or ex ample, for folder 4, pr ess 4 . F or tr ack 1 2, pr ess 1 , 2 . 3 Pre ss ENTER or 3 t o start/r est ar t pla yback. Using r andom pla y Files can be mono or st er eo. Use the r andom pla y feature t o play tr acks on a disc in a r andom or der . Playback st ops when all the tr acks ha ve pla y ed. 1 Pre ss RANDOM t o start r andom pla y . 2 T o cancel random pla y , pr ess 7 . Random pla y is also canceled if the disc tr a y is opened, y ou pre ss PROGR AM , or you use the number but t ons to jump t o another tr ack. Using r epeat pla y Use the r epeat pla y featur e t o r epeat the current tr ack, or all the tracks on the disc. 1 During playback, pr ess REPEA T t o selec t a repea t pla y mode. Each pr ess changes the r epeat pla y mode: ⢠Repeat T rack ⢠Repeat F older ⢠Repeat Disc ⢠Repeat Off If you st op playback or open the disc tr a y , repea t play is also canceled. Displa ying MP3 information 1 Pr ess DISPLA Y repea t edly during pla y - back t o display v arious MP3 information on-scr een. Ther e ar e four information scr eens: Displa y s when pla ying Play T rack 1/7 0.07 TRACK1~1 Play Folder 2/3 0.07 FOLDER~1 ë ë ë ë Play T rack 2 âÂÂ1 0.07 â 3.13/ 3.20 Play T r . Rate: 2 âÂÂ16 0.07 128kbps current track number/ total number of tracks in folder elapsed time of current track track name current folder number/total number of folders elapsed time of current track folder name current folder number/current track number elapsed time of current track remaining time of current track total time of current track current folder number/current track number elapsed time of current track transmission rate level Display off Displa y s when st opped Exit Folder 001 002 003 004 005 Folder 006 007 008 009 010 T rack 1 ~ 10 1 ~ 13 1 ~ 5 1 ~ 4 1 ~ 8 Tr a c k 1 ~ 9 1 ~ 11 1 ~ 3 1 ~ 22 1 ~ 15 1/2 Information: MP3 F olders and number of tr acks in each folder DISPLA Y
37 En 6 Pla ying MP3s Using the MP3 Navigat or Use the MP3 Navigat or to mak e searching for the track(s) y ou want t o play ea sier . Y ou can also use it t o add or clear tracks fr om the pr ogr am list. 1 Load a CD-R OM containing MP3 tr acks. 2 Pre ss MENU t o ent er the MP3 Naviga t or scr een. ⢠The left side of the scr een show s a list of folders cont aining MP3 tr acks. ⢠If you displa y the MP3 Na vigat or when a disc is pla ying, the currentl y pla ying folder and tr ack number s are sho wn at the t op left of the scr een. MP3 Navigator Exit Play Folder Current : 3 1-1 T rack 1.TRACK1~1 2.TRACK2~2 3.TRACK3~3 4.TRACK4~4 1.FOLDER~1 2.FOLDER~2 3.FOLDER~3 4.FOLDER~4 5.FOLDER~5 6.FOLDER~6 MENU ENTER ⢠On the right side is a list of MP3 tr acks fr om the fir st folder in the list. MP3 Navigator Exit Play Folder Current : 3 1-1 Tr a c k 1.TRACK1~1 2.TRACK2~2 3.TRACK3~3 4.TRACK4~4 1.FOLDER~1 2.FOLDER~2 3.FOLDER~3 4.FOLDER~4 5.FOLDER~5 6.FOLDER~6 MENU ENTER Del PGM CLEAR 1~4 1~10 Na vigat e using the follo wing contr ols: Jo y stick left/right â Select folder and tr acks from the current scr een. Jo y stick up/down â Select the pre vious/ne xt of folders and tr acks. T o mov e r apidly up or down a long list of folders or tr acks, pr ess and hold the Jo y stick up/down. ENTER â Pla y the currentl y select ed folder or track. MP3 tr acks that are unplay able on this pla yer ar e aut omaticall y skipped and the displa y show s âÂÂUNPLA Y ABLE MP3 F ORMA Tâ . MENU â Exit the MP3 Naviga t or PR OGR AM â Add the currentl y select ed tr ack to the progr am list. (T r acks in the progr am list ar e marked .) Pre ssing PR OGRAM r epeat edly will add the tr ack to the pr ogr am list repea t edly . See Making a program list of MP3 tracks on page 3 8 for how t o use progr am pla y . (Pre ss MENU to e xit the MP3 Na vigat or first.) CLEAR â Clear the currentl y selected tr ack fr om the progr am list. T o tal n umber of T r ack T o tal n umber of F older
38 En Pla ying MP3s 6 Making a progr am list of MP3 tr acks 1 Pre ss PR OGR AM t o ent er the MP3 Progr am scr een. If you added tr acks t o the progr am list fr om the Using the MP3 navig at or on page 3 7 , the tr acks ar e displa y ed here. ENTER PROGRAM MP3 Program Exit Play Move Folder : 001~25 â â â :â â âÂÂâ â âÂÂ: â â âÂÂâ â âÂÂ: â â âÂÂâ â âÂÂ: â â â â â â :â â âÂÂâ â âÂÂ: â â âÂÂâ â âÂÂ: â â âÂÂâ â âÂÂ: â â â â â â :â â âÂÂâ â âÂÂ: â â âÂÂâ â âÂÂ: â â âÂÂâ â âÂÂ: â â â â â â :â â âÂÂâ â âÂÂ: â â âÂÂâ â âÂÂ: â â âÂÂâ â âÂÂ: â â â â â â :â â âÂÂâ â âÂÂ: â â âÂÂâ â âÂÂ: â â âÂÂâ â âÂÂ: â â â â â â â â â â â : â â â â â â â â Fr om this screen you can ent er folder and tr ack number s directl y to build up a pr ogr am list. 2 Use the number but t ons t o ent er a thr ee- digit folder number . The number of folders on the disc is displa yed in the t op-left of the scr een. Once youâÂÂve ent ered a valid folder number , the name of the folder appears. ENTER PROGRAM MP3 Program Exit Play Move T rack 001~10 001: â â âÂÂâ â âÂÂ: â â âÂÂâ â âÂÂ: â â âÂÂâ â âÂÂ: â â â â â â :â â âÂÂâ â âÂÂ: â â âÂÂâ â âÂÂ: â â âÂÂâ â âÂÂ: â â â â â â :â â âÂÂâ â âÂÂ: â â âÂÂâ â âÂÂ: â â âÂÂâ â âÂÂ: â â â â â â :â â âÂÂâ â âÂÂ: â â âÂÂâ â âÂÂ: â â âÂÂâ â âÂÂ: â â â â â â :â â âÂÂâ â âÂÂ: â â âÂÂâ â âÂÂ: â â âÂÂâ â âÂÂ: â â â FOLDER1~ : â â â â â â â â T ot al number of folder or tr ack F older name T rack name 3 Use the number but t ons t o ent er a thr ee- digit track number . The number of tr acks in the current folder is displa y ed in the t op-left of the screen. ENTER PROGRAM MP3 Program Exit Play Folder 001~25 001:008 â â âÂÂ: â â âÂÂâ â âÂÂ: â â âÂÂâ â âÂÂ: â â â â â â :â â âÂÂâ â âÂÂ: â â âÂÂâ â âÂÂ: â â âÂÂâ â âÂÂ: â â â â â â :â â âÂÂâ â âÂÂ: â â âÂÂâ â âÂÂ: â â âÂÂâ â âÂÂ: â â â â â â :â â âÂÂâ â âÂÂ: â â âÂÂâ â âÂÂ: â â âÂÂâ â âÂÂ: â â â â â â :â â âÂÂâ â âÂÂ: â â âÂÂâ â âÂÂ: â â âÂÂâ â âÂÂ: â â â â â â â â â â â : â â â â â â â â Move Na vigat e using the follo wing contr ols: Jo y stick â Na vigat e the progr am list. CLEAR â Clear the currentl y select ed item in the progr am list. ENTER â Start pla ying the progr am list. PR OGR AM â Exit the MP3 Pr ogr am screen.
39 En 7 D VD Se tup Menu Using the Setup menu The Setup men u give s you access t o all the play erâ s set tings. Pr ess SETUP to displa y/leav e the menu and the Jo y stick and ENTER but tons on the r emot e to na vigat e and select op tions. In some screens y ou can pr ess RETURN t o leav e the scr een without making an y changes. The contr ols for each menu ar e shown a t the bot t om of the scr een. If an option is gr ay ed out it means that it canno t be changed at the curr ent time. This is usually because a disc is pla ying. St op the disc, then change the se t ting. The curr ent se t ting for any op tion is mark ed with a colored bo x. The color of the box indica te s what kind of disc the set ting is applicable to: blue for D VD only; y ellow for D VD and Super VCD/V ideo CD; orange for D VD-Audio and S A CD/CD; green for an y t ype of disc. Not e The language options sho wn in the on-screen displa y illustra tions on the following page s may no t correspond t o those av ailable in y our country or r egion. Setup Menu Mode ⢠Default set ting: Exper t The Expert setup menu give s you acce ss t o all the pla yerâ s set tings. Switch t o Basic for a reduced set of mor e commonly used se t tings. The Basic menu also fea tures an informa tion bar which t ells you mor e about what the curr ently highlight ed op tion means. Sections belo w mark ed with the icon ar e a vailable only in Expert mode. â â â â General A2 V2 Language Audio1 Video1 Exit Move Setup Menu Mode Setup Navigator Parental Lock Bonus Group Auto Disc Menu Group Playback Expert Basic Off (us) On Single SETUP àDVD PLA YER SET UP STOP ENTER 7 RETURN Not e This r emot e is for the D V - S7 3 3A. The but tons ar e the same for the D V -4 7A.
40 En D VD Se tup Menu 7 OSD Set tings OSD Language ⢠Set in Setup Navigator (default: English) Choose the language y ou want the OSDs in. â â â Language A2 V2 General Audio1 Video1 Exit Move OSD Language Audio Language Subtitle Language Auto Language DVD Language Subtitle Display Subtitle Off English fran çais Deutsch Italiano Espa ñol On Selected Subtitle SETUP ⢠T aiw anese model: English On Scr een Display ⢠Default set ting: On If you pr efer not t o hav e the oper ation displa ys shown on-scr een, change the set ting t o Off . â â â Video2 A2 Language General Audio1 V1 Exit Move Background Video Adjust Still Picture On Screen Display Angle Indicator Black Auto On Off SETUP Audio set tings Audio DR C ⢠Default set ting: Off When wa tching Dolb y Digital D VDs at low volume, itâ s eas y t o lose the lo w le vel sounds complet elyâÂÂincluding some of the dialog. Switching on Audio DR C (Dynamic Range Control ) can help things b y bringing up the low lev el sounds, while keeping the lid on high le vel peaks. The Off set ting leav es the original dynamics int act; On âÂÂsquashe sâ the dynamics; but e xactly how m uch differ ence y ou can hear bet ween the set tings will depend on the mat erial youâÂÂr e wa tching. SETUP â â â â â V2 Video1 General A2 Language Exit Move Audio DRC Dolby Digital Out DTS Out Linear PCM Out MPEG Out Digital Out SACD Playback Audio1 Off On DTS 3 PCM Down Sample On MPEG 3 PCM On 2ch Area R emember ⢠Audio DR C is only effective with Dolb y Digit al audio sour ces. ⢠The effect of Audio DR C depends on your speak er s and A V amplifier set tings.
41 En 7 D VD Se tup Menu Dolb y Digital Out ⢠Default: Dolby Digit al Y ou only need to mak e this setting if you connect ed this sy stem to another component (AV amplifier , etc.) using one of the digital outputs. If your A V amplifier (or other connect ed component) is Dolb y Digit al compatible, set t o Dolby Digit al , o therwise set t o Dolby Digit al 3 PCM . â â â â â V2 Video1 General A2 Language Exit Move Audio DRC Dolby Digital Out DTS Out Linear PCM Out MPEG Out Digital Out SACD Playback Audio1 Off Dolby Digital Dolby Digital 3 PCM Down Sample On MPEG 3 PCM On 2ch Area SETUP D TS Out ⢠Default set ting: DTS 3 PCM Y ou only need to mak e this setting if you connect ed the player t o another component (AV amplifier , etc.) using one of the digital outputs. If your A V amplifier (or other connect ed component) has a built -in DTS decoder , se t this to DT S , otherwise set t o D TS 3 PCM . Check the manual that came with the o ther compo- nent if youâÂÂr e unsure whe ther it is D TS compat - ible. â â â â â â V2 Video1 General A2 Language Exit Move Audio DRC Dolby Digital Out DTS Out Linear PCM Out MPEG Out Digital Out SACD Playback Audio1 Off Dolby Digital DTS DTS 3 PCM MPEG 3 PCM On 2ch Area SETUP Impor tant If you se t to D TS with a non-D TS compatible amplifier , noise will be output when you pla y a D TS disc. Linear PCM Out ⢠Default set ting: Down Sample On Y ou only need to mak e this setting if you connect ed the player t o another component (A V amplifier , etc.) using one of the digital outputs. If your A V amplifier (or other connect ed component) is compatible with high sampling r at es (9 6 kHz), set this t o Do wn Sample Off , otherwise set it t o Down Sample On (9 6 kHz audio is conv erted t o a more compa tible 4 8 kHz). Check the manual that came with the other component if y ouâÂÂre unsur e whether it is 9 6 kHz compatible. â â â â â â V2 Video1 General A2 Language Exit Move Audio DRC Dolby Digital Out DTS Out Linear PCM Out MPEG Out Digital Out SACD Playback Audio1 Off Dolby Digital DTS 3 PCM Down Sample On Down Sample Off On 2ch Area SETUP Not e Even when se t t o Down Sample Off , some discs will only output do wn sampled audio through the digital output s. High sampling r at e D VD-Audio discs (1 9 2kHz or 1 7 6.4kHz) alwa y s output audio do wn sampled t o 9 6kHz or 8 8.2kHz thr ough the digit al outputs.
42 En D VD Se tup Menu 7 MPEG Out ⢠Default set ting: MPEG 3 PCM Y ou only need to mak e this setting if you connect ed the player t o another component (A V amplifier , etc.) using one of the digital outs. If your A V amplifier (or other connect ed component) is compatible with MPEG audio, se t this t o MPEG, otherwise se t it t o MPEG 3 PCM (MPEG audio is conv erted t o more compa tible PCM audio). Check the manual that came with the other component if y ouâÂÂre unsur e whether it is MPEG audio compatible. â â â â â V2 Video1 General A2 Language Exit Move Audio DRC Dolby Digital Out DTS Out Linear PCM Out MPEG Out Digital Out SACD Playback Audio1 Off Dolby Digital DTS 3 PCM Down Sample On MPEG MPEG 3 PCM 2ch Area SETUP Digital Out ⢠Default set ting: On If at an y time you need t o switch off the digital audio output, set this t o Off , otherwise lea ve it On . Not e that y ou canâÂÂt switch on/off the optical and coaxial outputs individuall y . â â â â â V2 Video1 General A2 Language Exit Move Audio DRC Dolby Digital Out DTS Out Linear PCM Out MPEG Out Digital Out SACD Playback Audio1 Off Dolby Digital DTS 3 PCM Down Sample On MPEG 3 PCM On Off SETUP S A CD Pla yback ⢠Default set ting: 2ch Area SA CD discs can be divided up int o sev er al different ar eas â st ereo audio, 5.1 channel audio and, for h ybrid SA CDs, st andard CD audio. The SA CD Pla yback set ting enables y ou t o select which ar ea of the disc you want t o pla y . â â â â V2 Video1 General A2 Language Exit Move Audio DRC Dolby Digital Out DTS Out Linear PCM Out MPEG Out Digital Out SACD Playback Audio1 Off Dolby Digital DTS 3 PCM Down Sample On 2ch Area Multi-ch Area CD Area SETUP Not e If you select an ar ea that isnâÂÂt on the disc loaded, a differ ent ar ea of the disc will pla y . F or e xample, if y ou choose st andar d CD audio but the disc loaded is not a h ybrid SA CD, the st er eo SA CD audio will pla y . V ir tual Surr ound ⢠Default set ting: Off If you connected y our D VD pla yer using only the st er eo analog outputs and se t Audio Out (see below) t o 2 Channel, you can simulat e surr ound sound b y set ting V irtual Surr ound t o T ruSurround . â â â â â Audio2 Video1 Language General A1 V2 Exit Move Virtual Surround Legato PRO Audio Out Speaker Setting Gain Setting Hi-Bit CD Digital Direct Off T ruSurround 2Channel Fix On Off SETUP Not e ⢠There is no effect when the audio sour ce is D VD- Audio, DTS or 9 6 kHz LPCM or during CD, MP3 or S A CD playback. ⢠The digital audio output lev el is reduced when pla ying 2 channel Dolb y Digital D VDs or V ideo CDs with T ruSurround select ed. If you pla y a multichannel Dolb y Digit al D VD with Dolby Digit al t o PCM conv er sion (see page 4 1 ) and T ruSurround select ed, there is no digital output. ⢠How good the surr ound effect is varie s with the disc. T ruSurr ound T ruSurround uses t echnology that simula t es multichannel surr ound sound using only t w o speaker s.
43 En 7 D VD Se tup Menu Audio Out ⢠Set in Setup Navigator (Default: 2 Channel) If you connected this play er to your amplifier using the 5.1 channel analog outputs (front, surround, cent er and subw oofer outs), set this t o 5.1 Channel ; if you connect ed only the st er eo outs, set to 2 Channel . â â â â â â Audio2 Video1 Language General A1 V2 Exit Move Virtual Surround Legato PRO Audio Out Speaker Setting Gain Setting Hi-Bit CD Digital Direct Off Standard 2 Channel 5.1 Channel Fix On Off SETUP Not e ⢠Even if you set Audio Out to 5.1 Channel, youâÂÂll only get sound fr om all speak er s when pla ying a multi-channel D VD-Audio disc, or Dolb y Digit al, D TS or MPEG encoded D VD disc. ⢠If you se t to 2 Channel, Dolb y Digit al, D TS and MPEG audio is mixed do wn to t wo channels so you still hear all the audio r ecorded on the disc. ⢠Some D VD-Audio discs donâÂÂt allow down-mixing of audio. These discs alwa ys output multi-channel audio regar dless of the set ting made her e. About sour ce audio output When the sour ce output mode has been switched be t ween the 5.1 Channel and 2 Channel mode set tings using the Audio Out set ting in the Setup screen Audio 2 menu, audio output for each sour ce will be as sho wn on the following t able. *1 : Discs that pr ohibit downmixing will be output as 5.1channel e ven if 2 Channel is select ed. *2 : Discs that pr ohibit downmixing also mut e the digital output. *3 : If the sound is mono, Lch and Rch audio will be the same. AUDIO CONTENTS OUTPUT MODE AUDIO OUT (2 CH) 5.1 CH 2 CH 5.1 CH 2 CH 5.1 CH/ 2 CH 5.1 CH 2 CH 5.1 CH/ 2 CH 5.1 CH/ 2 CH DV D CD SACD Super VCD/ Video CD Dolby Digital Dolby Digital Kar aoke LPCM DTS DV D -Audio Fr ont Lch, Rch 2 ch DOWNMIX Lch, Rch 2 ch DOWNMIX Lch, Rch 2 ch DOWNMIX Lch, Rch MUTE MUTE Cent er Surround LS, R S 2 ch DO WNMIX Lch, Rch Lch, Rch Lch, Rch AUDIO OUT (5.1 CH) DIGIT AL OUTPUT (S/PDIF) Lch, Rch Fr ont Lch, Rch L, R (Fr ont L,R) Cent er Surround L,R Sub W oofer Dolby Digit al or MPEG 3 PCM Dolby Digit al or MPEG Dolby Digit al Lch, Rch DTS *2 *3 *1 Cent er Surround LS, R S LFE LFE MUTE Lch, Rch MUTE MUTE Dolby Digit al Lch, Rch Lch, Rch MUTE MUTE 5.1 CH/ 2 CH D VD-RW Lch, Rch Dolby Digit al, MPEG or PCM (Lch, Rch) MUTE 2 ch DOWNMIX Lch, Rch 5.1 CH 2 CH Fr ont Lch, Rch Lch, Rch Cent er Surround LS, R S MPEG LFE MUTE 5.1 CH 2 CH Fr ont Lch, Rch Cent er Surround LS, R S LFE MUTE MPEG 5.1 CH 2 CH 2 ch DO WNMIX Lch, Rch Fr ont Lch, Rch Cent er Surround LS, R S LFE MUTE Lch, Rch Lch, Rch
44 En D VD Se tup Menu 7 Speak er Set ting ⢠Set in Setup Navigator (default: Cent er: Large | Sub: On | Surround: Large | Distance: all 3.0m ) Y ou only need to make this setting if y ou connected this player to your amplifier using the 5.1 channel analog outputs. This setting does not affect digit al audio output. F ollow the on-screen displa ys t o describe which speaker s ar e in your sy stem and their sizes and positions. Set the size of y our speaker s in the Size screen. The front left/right ( L/R) speaker s ha v e a fixed set ting of Lar ge . The center ( C ), left surround (LS ) and right surround ( RS) speaker s can each be set to Lar ge , Small or Off . Set a speaker t o Lar ge if the main speaker cone is 1 2cm or more; set t o Small if the itâ s less than 1 2cm. Not e that the LS and RS speaker s cannot be set independently . The subwoofer ( SW) can onl y be set t o On or Off . â â â â â â Audio2 Video1 Language General A1 V2 Exit Move Virtual Surround Legato PRO Audio Out Speaker Setting Gain Setting Hi-Bit CD Digital Direct Off Standard 2 Channel Start Fix On Off SETUP Select ENTER Exit Select Distance Return Audio2 Video1 Language General A1 V2 Speaker Setting L/R C LS RS SW Size â Large â Large â Large â Large â On LR C SW LS RS SETUP ENTER Not e ⢠When listening t o a D VD audio sour ce, the C , LS , and RS speaker s will aut omatically be se t t o the Large size se t ting. Ho w ev er , the sound will not be affect ed b y the change. Listening t o another sour ce will r eturn the speak ers t o their original se t tings. ⢠F or D VD-Audio only , if the C , LS , or RS speak er s is set t o Off, the audio is aut omati- cally do wnmixed t o st ereo. The gr aphic on the right of the screen repr esents your speak er setup, with the currently select ed speakerâ s name highlight ed in blue, and the speaker s set t o On highlighted in yello w . Set the dist ance from your main list ening position t o each speaker in the Distance scr een. The distance set ting for an y speak er that was set t o Off in the Size screen will be gr a yed out. F or the other speaker s, ent er the dist ance to the near est 0.1m (1 0cm). Y ou can set the dist ance for the L/R speaker s bet ween 0.3m and 9m. Not e that you must set the C and SW speak ers within 2m of the L/R set ting. The LS and RS speak ers must be set within - 6m and 2m of the L/R set ting. The gr aphic on the right of the screen repr esents your speak er setup, with the currently select ed speakerâ s name highlight ed in blue, and the speaker s set t o On highlighted in yello w . Not e ⢠If your subw oofer is placed be yond the adjustment r ange (L/R ñ2m), set t o the near est se t ting possible. Surround sound cohesion should no t be affected v ery much. ⢠This set ting does not appl y t o SA CD play - back. Exit Select Size Return Audio2 Video1 Language General A1 V2 Speaker Setting L/R C LS RS SW Distance â 0.3m â 0.3m â 0.3m â 0.3m â 0.3m LR C SW LS RS SETUP ENTER Pre ss ENTER
45 En 7 D VD Se tup Menu Legat o PR O ⢠Default set ting: Off Legat o PR O subtly change s the char act er of the sound. Ther e are four se t tings plus Off : ⢠Off ⢠Standar d â Give s the sound a more forw ar d, live feel ⢠Effec t 1 â Bright and lively ⢠Effec t 2 â Soft and rich ⢠Effec t 3 â Solid and well balanced Choose the set ting that best suit s the music youâÂÂr e list ening t o. St andar d is r ecommended for all music. â â Audio2 Video1 Language General A1 V2 Exit Move Virtual Surround Legato PRO Audio Out Speaker Setting Gain Setting Hi-Bit CD Digital Direct Off Off Standard Effect1 Effect2 Effect3 Off SETUP Not e ⢠The Legato PR O digital filt er affects mainly fr equencies out side of the audible r ange. ⢠Depending on the listening conditions, y ou ma y find the effect of Legat o PR O difficult to hear . ⢠The Legato PR O effect is only applied t o the fr ont left/right channels. ⢠Legato PR O does not w ork with 1 9 2kHz D VD-Audio discs or SA CD. Hi-bit ⢠Default set ting: On When set t o On, this featur e ext ends the dynamic r ange of the main front speak er s b y effectivel y increasing the bit dep th from 1 6-2 0 bit t o 2 4 bit. This allow s the pla y er t o re veal grea ter de t ail in lo w lev el audio. â â â â â SETUP Audio2 Video1 Language General A1 V2 Exit Move Virtual Surround Legato PRO Audio Out Speaker Setting Gain Setting Hi âÂÂBit CD Digital Direct Off Off 2 Channel Fix On Off
46 En D VD Se tup Menu 7 Gain Set tings ⢠Default set ting: Fix Y ou may want to make this setting if you connected this player to your amplifier using the 5.1 channel analog outputs. Under the default set ting, all channels ar e output at the relativ e volume s they wer e r ecorded at. Change the set ting t o V ariable if you want t o adjust the rela tiv e volume lev els of an y of the speaker s. Adjustment is in the r ange of -6dB t o 6dB, in steps of 0.5dB. ⢠When set t o V ariable , the ov er all output lev el ma y sound quiet er than when set t o Fix . This is not a malfunction. Not e Gain set tings are not effective when pla ying a CD with CD Digital Direct set to On . â â â â â Audio2 Video1 Language General A1 V2 Exit Move SETUP Select ENTER Virtual Surround Legato PRO Audio Out Speaker Setting Gain Setting Hi âÂÂBit CD Digital Direct Off Off 2 Channel Fix V ariable Off Exit Select T est T one Return Audio2 Video1 Language General A1 V2 L C R RS LS SW Gain Setting â 0.0 dB â 0.0 dB â 0.0 dB â 0.0 dB â 0.0 dB â 0.0 dB L R SW LS RS SETUP ENTER T o help you gauge the corr ect gain le v els, set the T est T one t o On (te st tone fr om just that speak er) or Aut o (te st t one from each speak er in turn, ex cluding the subwoofer) then adjust the gain so that all speak ers appear t o be the same v olume from your list ening position. F ollow the on-screen displa ys t o select speaker s and set the channel levels. ⢠Y ou can adjust the T est T one set ting only when the pla y er is stopped. ⢠Many A V amplifier s allow you t o make similar set tings at the amplifier stage. In this case, se t the channel lev els at the pla yer or the amplifier , not both. ⢠As the t est t one pla ys through a speaker , its name is highlight ed in yello w on-scr een. Exit Select Gain Return Audio2 Video1 Language General A1 V2 L C R RS LS SW T est T one â Off â Off â Off â Off â Off â Off L R SW LS RS SETUP ENTER Remember Y ou can't use the te st t one function when the Audio Out set ting is 2 Channel (see page 4 3 ).The t est t one will not w ork with the disc tr a y open, or while a disc is playing. CD Digital Dir ec t ⢠Default set ting: Off Set ting this to On incr ease s CD audio qualit y by b ypassing cert ain audio circuit s in the pla yer that audio signal w ould o therwise pass thr ough. How ev er , this must be set t o Off for proper pla yback of DTS encoded CDs. â â â â â Audio2 Video1 Language General A1 V2 Exit Move Virtual Surround Legato PRO Audio Out Speaker Setting Gain Setting Hi âÂÂBit CD Digital Direct Off Off 2 Channel Fix On Off SETUP Remember If this set ting is se t t o On when a D TS CD is pla yback, noise is produced. Pre ss ENTER
47 En 7 D VD Se tup Menu V ideo set tings TV Scr een ⢠Set in Setup Navigator (Default: 1 6:9 (W ide) ) If you hav e a wide scr een TV , select the 1 6:9 (W ide) set tingâÂÂwidescr een D VD soft w ar e is then shown using the full scr een area. When pla ying softw are r ecorded in con v entional (4:3) format, the se t tings on your TV will de t ermine how the ma terial is pr esent edâÂÂsee the manual that came with y our TV for details on wha t options ar e av ailable. If your TV doe s not ha ve set tings for ho w 4:3 sour ces look, choose the 1 6:9(Compre ssed) set ting. The pictur e you see on y our TV will be det ermined by the disc. See page 6 8 for mor e information. If you ha v e a conv entional TV , choose either 4:3 (Let t er Box) or 4:3 (P an & Scan) . In Let t er Box mode, widescr een softw are is sho wn with black bars a t the top and bo t t om of the scr een. P an & Scan chops the sides off widescr een mat erial to make it fit the 4:3 scr een (so e ven though the pictur e looks lar ger on the screen, y ouâÂÂr e actually seeing less of the mo vie). â â Audio1 Video1 Language General A2 V2 Exit Move TV Screen Video Out S-Viveo Out Frame Search Screen Saver 4:3(Letter Box) 4:3(Pan&Scan) 16:9(Wide) 16:9(Compressed) Off SETUP Not e ⢠Y ou cannot change this set ting when a disc is pla ying. ⢠Some discs will not allow y ou to change the aspect r atio. S- V ideo Out ⢠Default set ting: S2 Y ou only need to mak e this setting if you connect ed this player t o your TV using an S- Video cord. If you find tha t the picture is str etched or dist or t ed on the default S2 se t ting, try chang - ing it t o S1 . â â â â Audio1 Video1 Language General A2 V2 Exit Move TV Screen Video Out S-Video Out Frame Search Screen Saver 16:9(Wide ) Video S1 S2 Off SETUP F r ame Sear ch ⢠Default set ting: Off Set this t o On if you w ant t o be able t o do fr ame-accur at e sear ching of D VD discs (see page 2 3 for how t o do a time & fr ame search). On the default set ting, the time & fr ame sear ch is not a vailable. â â â â Audio1 Video1 Language General A2 V2 Exit Move TV Screen Video Out S-Video Out Frame Search Screen Saver 16:9(Wide ) Video S2 On Off SETUP Scr een Sav er ⢠Default set ting: Off If a const ant image is displa yed on a con v en- tional CR T -t ype TV , it can âÂÂburn inâ lea ving a ghost image on the scr een. Switch t o On to make sur e that a const ant image is no t dis- pla yed for a danger ously long time. If the Screen Sa ver come s on when the Speak er Setup t est t one is playing, the t est t one will st op ( page 46). â â â â Audio1 Video1 Language General A2 V2 Exit Move TV Screen Video Out S-Video Out Frame Search Screen Saver 16:9(Wide ) Video S2 Off On Off SETUP
48 En D VD Se tup Menu 7 Backgr ound ⢠Default set ting: Black This specifies wha t the screen sho ws when the pla yer is st opped. â â â â â Video2 A2 Language General Audio1 V1 Exit Move Background Video Adjust Still Picture On Screen Display Angle Indicator Pioneer Logo Black Auto On On SETUP Component V ideo Compar ed t o a standar d int erlaced TV picture, a pr ogr essiv e scan TV is capable of st able, flick er - free image s. Set onl y if you connect ed the COMPONENT VIDEO OUT or D1/D2 D- Video jacks t o a pr ogr essiv e scan-compa tible TV or monit or . Mak e changes t o the Component V ideo set ting in the Setup scr een V ideo 1 menu. â â â Audio1 Video1 Language General A2 V2 Exit Move TV Screen Component Video S-Video Out Frame Search Screen Saver 16:9(Wide ) Progressive Interlace Off Off SETUP ⢠Progr essiv e â Use this set ting with TVs and monit ors that ha ve pr ogr essiv e scan compo- nent video inputs. Check the TVâ s instruction manual if y ou are not sur e about this. ⢠Interlace â (default se t ting) use this set ting with r egular TVs that ar e not compatible with pr ogr essiv e scan. Check the TVâ s instruction manual if y ou are not sur e about this. T ip If this pla yer is set t o output pr ogr essiv e-scan video, itâ s possible that the pictur e will appear stre tched when playing discs r ecorded in 4:3 format. This happens when the TVâ s aspect r atio is set âÂÂF ullâ . T o see the picture in it s corr ect aspect r atio, change the TV set ting t o âÂÂNormalâ . If your TV doe snâ t ha v e set tings t o change the aspect r atio of the pictur e, set this pla yer t o 1 6:9(Compre ssed) . Not e If you connect a TV that is not compatible with a pr ogr essiv e scan signal and choose one of the progr essiv e scan set tings, y ou will not be able t o see an y picture a t all. W ith your TV connect ed using either the composite or S- V ideo t erminals, choose the Int erlace set ting in the Component V ideo menu. Compatibilit y of this unit with pr ogr essiv e- scan TVs. âÂÂCONSUMERS SHOULD NO TE THA T NO T ALL HIGH DEFINITION TELEVISION SETS ARE FULL Y COMP A TIBLE WITH THIS PR ODUCT AND MA Y CAUSE AR TIF A CTS T O BE DIS- PLA YED IN THE PICTURE. IN CASE OF 5 2 5 PR OGRESSIVE SCAN PICTURE PR OBLEMS, IT IS RECOMMENDED THA T THE USER SWITCH THE CONNECTION T O THE âÂÂST AND ARD DEFINITIONâ OUTPUT . IF THERE ARE QUES- TIONS REGRADING OUR TV SET COMP A TIBIL - ITY WITH THIS MODEL 5 2 5p D VD PLA YER, PLEASE CONT ACT OUR CUS T OMER SER VICE CENTER. âÂÂ4 8 0P (5 2 5P) D VD PLA YER is compatible with the following Pioneer displa ys and monit ors.â PLASMA DISPLA Y (U.S. model) ⢠PDP -5 0 3 0HD ⢠PR O-1 000HD ⢠PDP -4 3 3 0HD PR OJECTION MONIT OR RECEIVER ⢠PR O-7 2 0HD ⢠PR O-6 2 0HD ⢠PR O-5 2 0HD ⢠SD-6 4 3HDS ⢠SD-5 3 3HDS
49 En 7 D VD Se tup Menu V ideo Adjust There ar e sev er al pr e set pictur e qualit y set tings that suit different kinds of displa y device (TV , Plasma displa y , etc.). Alt ernativ ely , set up your own and sa ve them in the pla yerâ s memory . â â â â â Video2 A2 Language General Audio1 V1 Exit Move Background Video Adjust Still Picture On Screen Display Angle Indicator Black Start Auto On On SETUP Selec ting a pre set 1 Selec t âÂÂStartâ . Y ou can also access these set tings b y pr essing V . ADJ . 2 Selec t âÂÂV ideo Memor y Selec tâ . Video Memory Select Video Setup 3 Selec t a pr eset. Memory 1 Memory 2 Memory 3 PDP Professional TV(CRT) ⢠TV (CR T) â optimized set tings for a standar d t ele vision set. ⢠PDP â optimized for a plasma displa y . ⢠Professional â (default set ting) optimized for a pr ofessional monit or . ⢠Memor y 1, 2, 3 â User pre set s (see page 51 for mor e on these) Y ou can highlight a pre set while a disc is pla ying (befor e you pr ess ENTER t o select it) to see the effect on the pictur e immediat ely . Not e Depending on the disc and y our TV/monit or , the effect of these set tings ma y not be clear .
50 En D VD Se tup Menu 7 ⢠Sharpness High â Adjusts the sharpne ss of the high-fr equency (finely de t ailed) elements in the pictur e. ⢠Sharpness Mid â Adjusts the sharpne ss of the mid-fr equency (less de tailed) elements in the pictur e. ⢠Detail â Adjust s ho w sharp edges appear in the pictur e. ⢠Whit e Le vel â A djusts the int ensit y of white in the pictur e. ⢠Black Lev el â Adjust s the int ensit y of black in the pictur e. ⢠Black Setup â F or correction of floating black colour . ⢠Gamma â Adjusts the brightness of the darker image s in the picture. ⢠Hue â Adjusts the ov er all colour balance bet ween r ed and green. ⢠Chroma Le vel â Adjust s ho w satur at ed colour s appear . ⢠Chroma Dela y â Compensat es for misalign- ment of the Y (brightness) and the C (colour) components. 4 Pr ess ENTER t o sav e your changes. Cr eating y our o wn se t ting (1) 1 Selec t âÂÂStartâ . Y ou can also access these set tings b y pre ssing V. ADJ . 2 Selec t âÂÂV ideo Setupâ Video Memory Select Video Setup 3 Move the Jo ystick up/do wn t o selec t a pic tur e qualit y parame t er , then mov e the Jo y stick left/right t o adjust that par amet er . Prog. Motion Move Select Check DISPLA Y ENTER fast slow ⢠Prog. Motion â When using pr ogr essive scan, this adjusts the motion and still pictur e qualit y . ⢠PureCinema â When w a tching D VD movies, Pur eCinema optimize s the pictur e qualit y . The default set ting is Auto1, but if the pictur e appear s unnatur al, then set t o Aut o2 , On or Off as de sir ed and adjust the Pr og. Motion set ting (see abo ve). See P ureCinema in the Glossar y st arting on page 6 1 . ⢠YNR â Adjust s the amount of noise reduction (NR) applied t o the Y (brightness) compo- nent. ⢠CNR â Adjusts the amount of noise r educ- tion (NR) applied t o the C (colour) compo- nent. ⢠MNR (Mosquito Noise R eduction) â Adjusts the amount of noise r eduction applied t o the mosquit o noise (video artifacts on the edge of the image r esulting fr om MPEG compre s- sion). ⢠BNR (Block Noise R eduction) â Adjusts the amount of noise r eduction applied t o the block noise.
51 En 7 D VD Se tup Menu Cr eating y our own set ting (2) 1 Selec t âÂÂStar tâ . Y ou can also access these set tings b y pre ssing V. ADJ . 2 Selec t âÂÂV ideo Setupâ 3 Pre ss DISPLA Y . Prog. Motion PureCinema YNR CNR MNR BNR Sharpness High Sharpness Mid Memory On Auto1 Auto2 Off off max off off max max off max fast slow soft fine soft fine Off 1 2 3 Page 1/2 Detail White Level Black Level Black Setup Gamma Hue Chroma Level Chroma Delay Memory min max off Page 2/2 slow green red min max â Off 0 IRE 7.5 IRE 12 3 min max â 4 Mov e the Joy stick up or do wn t o selec t a pic tur e quality par amet er , then mo v e the Jo y stick left or right t o adjust that par amet er . 5 T o sav e your change s in one of the user pr ese ts, highlight Memory 1, 2 or 3 and pr ess ENTER. Still Pic ture ⢠Default set ting: Aut o The play er uses one of t w o processe s when displa ying a still fr ame from a D VD disc. The default Aut o set ting aut omaticall y chooses the best set ting each time. ⢠Field â produce s a stable, gener ally shake-fr ee image. ⢠Fr ame â produces a sharper image, but mor e pr one to shake than field stills. â â Video2 A2 Language General Audio1 V1 Exit Move Background Video Adjust Still Picture On Screen Display Angle Indicator Pioneer Logo Field Frame Auto SETUP Angle Indicat or ⢠Default set ting: On If you prefer not t o see the camer a icon on-scr een during multi-angle scenes on D VD discs, change this set ting t o Off . â â â â Video2 A2 Language General Audio1 V1 Exit Move Background Video Adjust Still Picture On Screen Display Angle Indicator Pioneer Logo Auto On On Off SETUP
52 En D VD Se tup Menu 7 Language set tings Audio Language ⢠Default Set ting: English This set ting is your pr eferr ed audio language for D VD discs. If the language you specify her e is recor ded on a disc, the sy st em automa tically pla ys the disc in tha t language (although this depends on the Aut o Language set tingâÂÂsee page 5 4 ). Language A2 V2 General Audio1 Video1 Exit Move OSD Language Audio Language Subtitle Language Auto Language DVD Language Subtitle Display Subtitle Off English English French German Italian Spanish Other SETUP â â¢ T aiw anese model: English Chinese Other The D VD format r ecognizes 1 3 6 different languages. Choose Other if y ou want t o specify a language other than those list ed, then follow the on-scr een displa y to select a language. Y ou ma y also w ant t o refer t o the Language code list on page 66. List of Languages Code (0~2) en: English Language A2 V2 General Audio1 Video1 Exit Return Move Select / â Audio Language 05 1 4 SETUP ENTER T ip Y ou can switch bet ween the language s r ecorded on a D VD disc an y time during playback using the A UDIO but t on. (This does not affect this set ting.) Not e ⢠Y ou cannot switch language s if there is only one language r ecor ded on the disc. In this case, the mark is displa yed. ⢠F or some discs, selection can be made using the D VD menu. In the se cases, pr ess MENU t o displa y the D VD menu scr een and then mak e y our selection.
53 En 7 D VD Se tup Menu Subtitle Language ⢠Default Set ting: English This set ting is your pr eferred sub title language for D VD discs. If the language you specify her e is r ecor ded on a disc, the s y st em automa tically pla ys the disc with those sub titles (although this depends on the Aut o Language set tingâ see page 5 4 ). Language A2 V2 General Audio1 Video1 SETUP Exit Move OSD Language Audio Language Subtitle Language Auto Language DVD Language Subtitle Display Subtitle Off English English French German Italian Spanish Other â â¢ T aiw anese model: English Chinese Other The D VD format r ecognizes 1 3 6 different languages. Choose Other if y ou want t o specify a language other than those list ed, then follow the on-scr een displa y to select a language. Y ou ma y also w ant t o refer t o the Language code list on page 66. List of Languages Code (0~2) en: English Language A2 V2 General Audio1 Video1 Exit Return Move Select / â Subtitle Language 05 1 4 SETUP ENTER T ip Y ou can change or switch off the subtitles on a D VD disc an y time during pla yback using the SUBTITLE but t on. (This does no t affect this set ting.) Not e ⢠The subtitle language cannot be switched if the subtitle language is no t r ecor ded, or if only one language is r ecorded. In this ca se, the mark will be display ed. ⢠T o clear subtitles during pla yback, press SUBTITLE and then pr ess CLEAR, or pr ess SUBTITLE until Off appear s. ⢠F or some discs, subtitle language selection can be made using the menu on the D VD. In this case, pr ess MENU t o displa y the D VD menu scr een and then make y our selection.
54 En D VD Se tup Menu 7 Aut o Language ⢠Default Set ting: On When set t o On, the pla y er alwa ys select s the default audio language on a D VD disc (French dialog for a Fr ench movie, for e xample), and displa y s subtitles in y our pr eferr ed subtitle language only if tha t is set t o something different. In o ther wor ds, mo vies in your na tive language wonâÂÂt ha ve an y subtitles, while for eign language movie s will be shown with subtitles. Set t o Off t o ha ve the s y st em pla y discs strictl y accor ding t o your Audio Language and Subtitle Language set tings. F or Auto Language t o w ork, the Audio Lan- guage and Subtitle Language se t tings must be the sameâÂÂsee pages 5 2, 5 3 . â â â â â â Language A2 V2 General Audio1 Video1 Exit Move OSD Language Audio Language Subtitle Language Auto Language DVD Language Subtitle Display Subtitle Off English English English On Off On Selected Subtitle SETUP T ip Y ou can still switch audio and subtitle language s on pla yback using the A UDIO and SUBTITLE but tons. D VD Language ⢠Default Set ting: w/Subtitle Language Some multilingual discs ha ve disc menus in sev er al languages. This set ting specifies in which language the disc menus should appear . Lea ve on the default set ting for menus t o appear in the same language as y our Sub title Lan- guage âÂÂsee page 5 3 . Language A2 V2 General Audio1 Video1 Exit Move OSD Language Audio Language Subtitle Language Auto Language DVD Language Subtitle Display Subtitle Off w/ Subtitle Language English French German Italian Spanish Other SETUP ⢠T aiw anese model: English Chinese Other The D VD format r ecognizes 1 3 6 different languages. Choose Other if y ou want t o specify a language other than those list ed, then follow the on-scr een displa y to select a language. Y ou ma y also want t o refer t o the Language code list on page 66 . List of Languages Code (0~2) en: English Language A2 V2 General Audio1 Video1 Exit Return Move Select / â DVD Language 05 1 4 SETUP ENTER Not e Y ou can also select the D VD language fr om the D VD disc menu. Pr ess MENU t o open the D VD menu and mak e y our selection accor dingly .
55 En 7 D VD Se tup Menu Gener al set tings Setup Na vigat or Use the Setup Na vigat or to mak e the basic set tings for y our D VD pla yer . See page 1 7 for det ailed instructions. â â â â General A2 V2 Language Audio1 Video1 Exit Move Setup Menu Mode Setup Navigator Parental Lock Bonus Group Auto Disc Menu Group Playback Expert Start Off (us) On Single SETUP P ar ental Lock ⢠Default lev el: Off ⢠Default passwor d: none ⢠Default country code: us (2 1 1 9) Some D VD V ideo discs feature a P ar ent al Lock lev el. If your pla yer is se t t o a low er lev el than the disc, it will requir e y ou t o ent er a passwor d befor e the disc will pla y . This gives y ou some contr ol about what y our children w atch on your D VD pla yer . Some discs also support the Country Code featur e. The pla yer does no t play cert ain scenes on these discs, depending on the country code you se t. Before y ou can set the P ar ental Lock le vel or the Country Code y ou must r egist er a passwor d. As the passw ord o wner , you can change the P ar ental Lock le vel or Country Code whene v er you lik e. Y ou can also change the passw or d. â â â General A2 V2 Language Audio1 Video1 Exit Move Setup Menu Mode Setup Navigator Parental Lock Bonus Group Auto Disc Menu Group Playback Expert Password Level Country Code Single SETUP Not e Not all discs that y ou ma y consider inappr opri- at e for your childr en use the P arent al Lock featur e. These discs will alw ay s pla y without requiring the pa sswor d fir st. Subtitle Displa y ⢠Default Set ting: On When set t o On , the play er displa ys sub titles accor ding t o the Subtitle Language and Aut o Language set tings. Set to Off t o switch subtitles off alt ogether (although see Sub title Off on this page for special cases). Se t t o Assist Subtitle t o hav e the pla yer displa y the extr a assistiv e subtitles recor ded on t o some D VD discs. â â â â Language A2 V2 General Audio1 Video1 Exit Move OSD Language Audio Language Subtitle Language Auto Language DVD Language Subtitle Display Subtitle Off English English English On On Off Assist Subtitle SETUP Not e ⢠If there is no subtitle informa tion recor ded on the disc, no subtitles ar e displa yed e ven if this function is set t o On. ⢠Whether this set ting is On or Off , y ou can still switch subtitle s (or switch them off) using the SUBTITLE but t on. Subtitle Off ⢠Default Set ting: Selec t ed Subtitle Some discs displa y subtitle s ev en if the Subtitle Displa y set ting (abov e) is set t o Off . In this case, y ou can either ha ve the sub titles displa yed in the same language as y our preferr ed audio language ( W ith Audio ), or in y our pr eferr ed subtitle language ( Select ed Subtitle ). If the Audio Language and Subtitle Language set tings ar e the same then both of these choices will give the same r esult. â â â â â Language A2 V2 General Audio1 Video1 Exit Move OSD Language Audio Language Subtitle Language Auto Language DVD Language Subtitle Display Subtitle Off English English English On English With Audio Selected Subtitle SETUP
56 En D VD Se tup Menu 7 R egist ering a ne w passwor d Y ou must regist er a passwor d before y ou can change the P arent al Lock level or ent er a Country Code. 1 Selec t âÂÂP assw ordâ . General A2 V2 Language Audio1 Video1 Exit / â Move Return Parental Lock: Register Code Number SETUP 2 Use the number but t ons t o enter a 4-digit passw or d. Itâ s also possible t o use the Joy stick t o set the passw or d (up and down t o set the number; left and right to change the cur sor position). 3 Pre ss ENTER t o regist er the passwor d. If you for get y our passwor d, y ou can re set the sy st em then r egister a ne w one. See page 6 5 for how t o re set the pla yer . Changing y our passwor d T o change y our passw ord, confirm your e xisting passw or d then enter a ne w one. 1 Selec t âÂÂPa sswor d Changeâ . 2 Use the number but t ons t o ent er y our existing passw ord. ⢠The number s appear as ast erisks as you ent er them. ⢠Itâ s also possible t o use the Jo y stick t o set the passw ord (up and down t o set the number; left and right t o change the cur sor position). 3 Pre ss ENTER. 4 Enter a new passw or d. 5 Pre ss ENTER. Set ting/changing the P ar ental Lock le vel 1 Selec t âÂÂLev elâ . 2 Use number but t ons t o ent er your passw or d, then pr ess ENTER. 3 Selec t a new le v el. Mov e left war d t o lock mor e lev els (mor e discs will requir e the passw ord); right war d t o unlock lev els. Y ou canâÂÂt lock lev el 1. General A2 V2 Language Audio1 Video1 Exit Return Move Select Parental Lock: Level Change SETUP ENTER 1 Level 234 678 5 Off 4 Pre ss ENTER t o se t the new lev el. T ip Use the Condition Memory feature ( page 3 2 ) t o sa ve the P ar ental Lock lev el for individual discs. Set ting/changing the Country Code Y ou may also want t o refer t o the Country code list on page 66 . 1 Selec t âÂÂCountr y Codeâ . 2 Use number but tons t o ent er your passwor d, then press ENTER. 3 Selec t a countr y code. Y ou can select the country code by let ter or number . See page 66 for the list of country codes. List of Codes Code (0~2) us Language A2 V2 General Audio1 Video1 Exit Return Move Select / â Country Code 21 1 9 SETUP ENTER 4 Pre ss ENTER t o se t the ne w Countr y Code.
57 En 7 D VD Se tup Menu Aut o Disc Menu ⢠Default set ting: On This specifies whether the menu (T op menu) is aut omaticall y displa yed aft er loading a disc. Set t o On if you want the menu displa yed aut omatically , or Off if you donâ t want it display ed. â â â General A2 V2 Language Audio1 Video1 Exit Move Setup Menu Mode Setup Navigator Parental Lock Bonus Group Auto Disc Menu Group Playback Expert Off (us) On Off SETUP Not e Some D VD discs displa y a menu automa tically regar dless of this set ting. If you pre ss 3 while a disc is loading, this set ting is ignored. Bonus Gr oup Some D VD-Audio discs ha v e an extr a âÂÂbonusâ group tha t requir es a 4-digit ke y number t o access. See the disc packaging for de tails and the ke y number . When y ou try and pla y the bonus gr oup, the k e y number input scr een will aut omaticall y appear , although it is also a vailable fr om the Gener al menu. Input the number and pr ess ENTER . General A2 V2 Language Audio1 Video1 Exit / â Move Return Bonus Group: Key Number Input ENTER â â â â General A2 V2 Language Audio1 Video1 Exit Move Setup Menu Mode Setup Navigator Parental Lock Bonus Group Auto Disc Menu Group Playback Expert Off (us) Start On Single SETUP Not e If you eject the disc, switch the po wer off , or unplug the pla y er , you will need t o r e-enter the ke y number . Gr oup Playback ⢠Default set ting: Single D VD-Audio discs can ha v e up to 9 gr oups of tr acks. When set t o Single, the select ed group pla ys and then the disc st ops, or re turns t o the menu scr een. Use Gr oup Sear ch ( page 2 3 ) t o select the gr oup t o play . (Y ou cannot use the tr ack skip 4 / â or scan but tons 1 / á in this mode.) Set t o All if you w ant to pla y all the gr oups on a disc consecutivel y . Not e Even if the pla yer s is set t o All but you select a group t o pla y from the disc men u, only tha t group will pla y . If you st op pla yback, all gr oups will pla y again when y ou rest art pla yback. â â â General A2 V2 Language Audio1 Video1 Exit Move Setup Menu Mode Setup Navigator Parental Lock Bonus Group Auto Disc Menu Group Playback Expert Off (us) On All Single SETUP Pre ss ENTER t wice
58 En Additional Informa tion 8 Handling discs When holding discs of an y t ype, tak e care not to lea ve fingerprints, dirt or scr atches on the disc surface. Hold the disc by its edge or b y the cent er hole and edge. Damaged or dirt y discs can affect playback perfor - mance. T ak e car e also not to scr atch the label side of the disc. Although not as fr agile as the r ecorded side, scr atches can still r esult in a disc becoming unusable. Should a disc become marked with fingerprints, dust, etc., clean using a soft, dry cloth, wiping the disc lightly fr om the cent er t o the outside edge as shown in the diagr am belo w . W ipe lightly fr om the cent er of the disc using str aight strok es. DonâÂÂt wipe the disc sur face using cir cular strok es. If necessary , use a cloth soaked in alcohol, or a commerciall y a v ailable CD/D VD cleaning kit to clean a disc more thoroughl y . Nev er use benzine, thinner or other cleaning agents, including products designed for cleaning vin yl r ecor ds. St oring discs Although CDs and D VD discs ar e more dur able than vin yl recor ds, y ou should still t ak e care to handle and stor e discs corr ectly . When you'r e not using a disc, return it to its case and st ore upright. Av oid lea ving discs in ex cessiv ely cold, humid, or hot envir onments (including under direct sunlight). Don't glue paper or put sticker s onto the disc, or use a pencil, ball-point pen or other sharp-tipped writing instrument. These could all damage the disc. F or mor e det ailed care information see the instruc- tions that come with discs. Do not load mor e than one disc int o the pla yer . Discs t o av oid Discs spin at high speed inside the pla yer . If you can see that a disc is cr ack ed, chipped, warped, or otherwise damaged, don't risk using it in y our pla yerâÂÂy ou could end up damaging the unit. This unit is designed for use with con ventional, fully cir cular discs only . Use of shaped discs is not r ecommended for this product. Pioneer disclaims all liabilit y arising in connection with the use of shaped discs. Cleaning the pickup lens The D VD pla y erâ s lens should not become dirt y in normal use, but if for some r eason it should malfunction due t o dust or dirt, consult your near est Pioneer -authorized service center . Although lens cleaner s for CD pla yer s are commer cially a vailable, w e do not recommend using them since some ma y damage the lens. Pr oblems with condensation Condensation ma y form inside the pla yer if it is brought int o a warm r oom from out side, or if the t emper atur e of the room rise s quickly . Although the condensation w onâ t damage the pla yer , it ma y tempor arily impair its perfor - mance. F or this reason y ou should lea ve it t o adjust t o the w armer t emper atur e for about an hour before switching on and using.
59 En 8 Additional Informa tion Hints on inst allation W e want you t o enjo y using this unit for year s t o come, so please bear in mind the following points when choosing a suit able location for it: Do... â Use in a well-v entilat ed room. â Place on a solid, flat, lev el surface, such as a t able, shelf or st ereo r ack. Donâ t... â Use in a place exposed t o high t emper atur es or humidit y , including near r adiator s and other heat - gener ating appliances. â Place on a windo w sill or other place wher e the pla yer will be exposed t o direct sunlight. â Use in an ex cessivel y dust y or damp envir onment. â Place dir ectly on top of an amplifier , or other component in your st er eo sy st em that becomes hot in use. â Use near a t elevision or monit or as y ou may e xperience int erferenceâÂÂe speciall y if the t elevision uses an indoor antenna. â Use in a kitchen or other r oom where the pla yer ma y be exposed t o smoke or st eam. â Use on a thick rug or carpet, or cov er with clothâÂÂthis ma y pre vent proper cooling of the unit. â Place on an unst able surface, or one that is not lar ge enough to support all four of the unitâ s feet. Mo ving the pla y er If you need t o mo v e the pla y er , first press ST ANDB Y/ON on the fr ont panel t o turn the pla y er off. W ait for --OFF-- t o disappear fr om the displa y , then unplug the pow er cord. Nev er lift or mov e the unit during pla ybackâÂÂdiscs r ot at e at a high speed and may be damaged. P o w er cor d caution Handle the pow er cor d by the plug part. Do not pull out the plug by tug ging the cor d, and ne v er touch the pow er cord when your hands ar e we t, as this could cause a shor t cir cuit or electric shock. Do not place the unit, a piece of furniture, or other object on the pow er cor d or pinch the cord in an y other wa y . Nev er make a knot in the cord or tie it with other cords. The pow er cords should be r out ed so that the y are no t likely t o be stepped on. A damaged pow er cord can cause a fire or give you an electric shock. Check the pow er cord once in a while. If you find it damaged, ask y our neare st Pioneer authorized service cent er or your dealer for a replacement.
60 En Additional Informa tion 8 DT S R D TS st ands for Digit al Theater S yst em. D TS is a surr ound s y stem differ ent from Dolb y Digital that has become a popular surr ound sound format for mo vies. Dynamic r ange The difference be t w een the quiet est and loudest sounds possible in an audio signal (without dist or ting or get ting lost in noise). Dolby Digit al and D TS soundtr acks are capable of a v ery wide dynamic r ange, delivering dr amatic cinema-lik e effects. File e xt ension A tag added t o the end of a filename to indica t e the t ype of file. F or e xample, âÂÂ.mp3â indica t es an MP3 file. Gr oup (D VD-Audio only) A collection of tr acks on a D VD-Audio disc. Equivalent t o a D VD- Video title. See also T itle and T r ack . Int erlaced video A method of displa ying a pictur e in which odd- number ed lines are upda t ed in one pass, then e ven-number ed lines updat ed in the next. See also Pr ogressiv e scan video . MP3 MP3 (MPEG1 audio la yer 3) is a compr essed audio file format. File s are r ecognized by their file ext ension âÂÂ.mp3â or âÂÂ.MP3â . MPEG audio An audio format used on Super VCDs/V ideo CDs and some D VD discs. This unit can conv ert MPEG audio t o PCM format for wider compa t - ibilit y with digital r ecorder s and A V amplifier s. See also PCM . Glossar y Analog audio An electrical signal that dir ectly repr esents sound. Compar e this t o digital audio which can be an electrical signal, but is an indir ect repr esent ation of sound. See also Digital audio . Aspect ra tio The width of a TV scr een r elativ e to it s height. Conv entional TVs are 4:3 (in other w ords, the screen is almost squar e); widescr een models are 1 6:9 (the scr een is almost t wice as wide a s it is high). Bonus Gr oup (D VD-Audio only) An âÂÂe xtr aâ group on some D VD-Audio discs that requir es a k ey number t o access. See also Group . Br o w sable pic tur es (D VD-Audio only) A featur e of some D VD-Audio discs in which the user can bro w se still picture s recor ded on the disc a s the audio is pla yed. See also Slide show . Chapt er (D VD- V ideo, D VD-R W) Just as a book is split up int o sev er al chapt ers, a title on a D VD disc is usually divided int o chapt ers. See also T itle . Digital audio An indirect r epr esent ation of sound b y num- ber s. During r ecor ding, the sound is measur ed at discr et e int ervals (4 4,1 00 times a second for CD audio) b y an analog -t o-digital con vert er , gener ating a str eam of number s. On pla yback, a digit al-t o-analog con v erter gener at es an analog signal based on the se number s. See also Sampling frequenc y and Analog audio . Dolb y Digital 1 Using a maximum of 5.1 channels of audio, this high qualit y surround s y st em is used in many of the finer movie thea ter s around the w orld.
61 En 8 Additional Informa tion Pur eCinema (D VD- Video onl y) V ideo on a D VD discs ma y be either video mat erial (originally shot on video) or film mat erial (originally shot on film). V ideo mat erial has a fr ame r at e of 3 0 fr ames/sec.(NTSC), compar ed with 2 4 fr ames/sec. for film. This pla yer conv erts film mat erial t o 6 0 fr ames/sec. (in progr essiv e scan mode). Pur eCinema adjusts the picture so tha t it ma tches mor e closely the pictur e qualit y of a cinema screen. Y ou can see whether video on a D VD disc is film or video mat erial b y displa ying the video tr ansmission r at e (see page 3 4 ). If a hash mark (#) appear s abo ve the tr ansmission r a t e displa y , it is film mat erial. R egions (D VD- V ideo only) These associa te discs and pla y ers with particular area s of the w orld. This unit will only pla y discs that ha ve compa tible region code s. Y ou can find the r egion code of y our unit b y looking on the rear panel. Some discs ar e compatible with mor e than one region (or all r egions). Sampling fr equency The r at e at which sound is measur ed t o be turned int o digit al audio dat a. The higher the r at e, the bet ter the sound qualit y , but the more digit al information is gener at ed. St andar d CD audio has a sampling fr equency of 4 4.1kHz, which means 4 4,1 00 samples (mea sur ements) per second. See also Digital audio . Slidesho w (D VD, Super VCD/V ideo CD) A featur e of some D VD discs in which still pictur es r ecorded on the disc cy cle aut omati- cally as the audio is pla yed. See also Bro wsable picture s . T itle (D VD- V ideo only) A collection of chapt ers on a D VD- Video disc. Equivalent t o a D VD-Audio gr oup. See also Chapter and Gr oup . T r ack Audio CDs, Super VCDs/V ideo CDs and D VD- Audio discs all use tr acks to divide up the cont ent of a disc. The D VD-V ideo equivalent is called a chapt er . See also Chapter and Gr oup . MPEG video The video format used for Super VCDs/V ideo CDs and D VDs. Super VCDs/V ideo CDs uses the older MPEG-1 st andar d, while D VD uses the ne w er and much bet ter qualit y MPEG-2 stan- dar d. Multi-session A CD-R/R W that cont ains t wo or mor e âÂÂses- sionsâ . Each session is a complet e recor ding pr ocess, so each session is read a s a complet e disc. This pla yer can only r ead the fir st session on a disc. Optical digit al output A jack that output s digit al audio in the form of light pulses. Connect component s with optical digit al jacks using a special optical cor d, a vailable fr om good audio dealer s. P ack ed PCM (D VD-Audio only) A lossless compr ession s y st em that enables mor e PCM audio t o be stor ed on a D VD-Audio disc than w ould otherwise be possible. PCM (Pulse Code Modula tion) The most common s yst em of encoding digital audio, found on CDs and D A T . Ex cellent qualit y , but requir es a lot of dat a compared t o formats such as Dolb y Digital and MPEG audio. F or compatibilit y with digital audio r ecorder s (CD, MD and D A T) and A V amplifiers with digit al inputs, this unit can con vert Dolb y Digit al, D TS and MPEG audio t o PCM. See also Digital audio . PBC (Pla yBack Contr ol) (Super VCD/V ideo CD only) A s y st em of na vigating a Super VCD/V ideo CD thr ough on-scr een menus recor ded ont o the disc. Especially good for discs tha t you would normally no t w atch fr om beginning t o end all at onceâÂÂk ar aoke discs, for e xample. Pr ogr essive scan video Also called non-int erlaced video, this method of displa ying a picture upda t es all the lines in one pass, r esulting in a mor e st able, flick er -fr ee image than int erlaced video (for a given scanning r at e). See also Interlaced video .
62 En Additional Informa tion 8 Picture pla yback stops and the oper ation but t ons cannot be used. ⢠Pr ess 7 , then start playback again ( 3). ⢠Switch the po wer off once, unplug fr om the wall sock et, then plug back in and switch on again using the fr ont panel ST ANDB Y/ON . Ne w set tings made in the Setup screen menus while a disc is pla ying ar e ineffective. ⢠Some set tings can be changed while a disc is playing, but ar e not effectiv e until the disc is stopped then re start ed. This is not a malfunction. Mak e the same set ting when the pla yer is st opped. Pr ess 7 , then rest art pla yback ( 3). Not e tha t making set tings in the Setup scr een men us ma y cancel the RESUME function. Set tings are canceled. ⢠When the po wer is cut due t o pow er failure or b y unplugging the pow er cor d, set tings will be canceled. Pr ess S T ANDB Y/ON on the fr ont panel t o turn the pla yer off . W ait for âÂÂ--OFF--â t o disappear from the displa y , then unplug the pow er cord. No picture/No color . ⢠Incorr ect video connections. Check that connections ar e correct and that plugs ar e inserted full y . ⢠TV/monit or or AV amplifier se t tings are incorr ect. Check the instruction manual of the connect ed equipment. ⢠The Component V ideo menu is set t o Progr essiv e but y our TV/monit or is no t compatible with pr ogr essiv e scan. R econnect the pla yer t o your TV using a composit e or S- Video cord and set the TV to the appr opriat e input. No w choose the Int erlace set ting in the Component V ideo menu, then switch the TV input back t o the component input. ( page 4 8 ). R eset the pla yer ( page 6 5 ). Component V ideo will be r eset t o Int erlace but y ouâÂÂll also loose other set tings. Scr een is stretched or aspect does not change. ⢠The TV Screen set ting in the Setup menu is incorr ect. Set the TV Scr een option to ma tch the TV/monitor y ou're using ( page 4 7 ). T r ouble shooting Incorr ect oper ation is often mist aken for trouble or malfunction. If you think that ther e is something wrong with this component, check the points below . Sometimes the tr ouble may lie in another component. Inspect the other components and electrical appliances being used. If the trouble cannot be r ectified after checking the items belo w , ask your near est Pioneer authorized service cent er or your dealer to carry out r epair work. The disc is ejected aut omatically after loading. ⢠Dirt y or damaged disc. See page 5 8 for disc car e information. ⢠Disc not sea t ed pr operly in the disc guide. Align the disc pr operly . ⢠Incompatible r egion number . If the r egion number on a D VD- Video disc doe s not match the number on the pla yer , the disc cannot be used ( page 9 ). ⢠Condensation inside the pla yer . Allo w time for condensation t o ev apor at e. Avoid using the pla yer near an air -conditioning unit. Pla yback is not possible. ⢠Disc is loaded upside do wn. R eload the disc with the label side face up. ⢠A Super VCD that does no t conform with the IEC standar ds might not pla y normally . Cannot pla y D VD-RW disc ⢠If the displa y shows âÂÂCOPY PR O TECT PROGR AM, UNPLA Y ABLEâ , this means that this disc canno t be pla yed. D VD-Audio pla yback st ops. ⢠The disc ma y hav e been illegally copied. mark appear s on screen. ⢠The oper ation is pr ohibit ed b y the play er . mark appear s on screen. ⢠The select ed function does no t oper at e for that disc. When making changes in the Se tup OSD menus, is displa yed. ⢠There is a CD or Super VCD/V ideo CD loaded and the set ting that w as changed applie s only t o D VD discs. The set tings will tak e effect next time a D VD is loaded.
63 En 8 Additional Informa tion Scr een is suddenly stre tched when the Setup scr een is opened. ⢠If the Setup scr een is opened during playback of a D VD being view ed in the let ter bo x format, the scr een ma y switch t o the wide screen format. This is not a malfunction. The scr een will return t o normal when the Setup scr een is closed. Picture disturbance during pla yback or dark. ⢠This pla yer is compatible with Macro- Vision Sy stem cop y guard. Some discs include a cop y prev ention signal, and when this t ype of disc is pla yed back, stripes e tc., ma y appear on some sections of the pictur e depending on the TV . This is not a malfunction. ⢠The TV s y st em ma y be set inappr opriat ely . See Setting the TV Sy stem on page 1 6 . ⢠Discs r espond differ ently t o particular pla y er functions. This ma y result in the scr een becoming black for a brief inst ant or shaking slightly when the function is e xecut ed. These pr oblems are lar gely due t o differences bet ween discs and disc cont ent and are no t malfunctions of this pla yer . ⢠When using pr ogr essiv e-scan. If your TV is connect ed using the COMPONENT VIDEO OUT jacks, set the Component V ideo menu t o Interlace ( page 4 8 ). When r ecorded on a VCR or passed thr ough an A V selec t or , ther e is disturbance in the pla yback picture. ⢠Due t o the pla yerâ s cop y pro tection cir cuits, connec- tion of this de vice through a VCR or an A V select or ma y pr ev ent r ecording or cause pictur e problems. This is not a malfunction. Some set tings in the Setup Menu do not appear . The Setup Menu Mode is se t t o Basic ; set it to Expert ( page 3 9 ). The r emot e control doesn't seem t o work. ⢠The CONTR OL IN jack on the rear panel is connect ed. Use the r emot e control of the connect ed compo- nent t o control this pla yer . ⢠The remo t e control is t oo far from the pla yer , or the angle with the r emot e sensor is too wide. Use the r emot e within its oper ating r ange ( page 7 ). ⢠The bat t eries ar e exhaust ed. Put in new ba t t eries ( page 7 ). Cannot list en t o high-sampling r at e audio thr ough the digital output. ⢠Linear PCM Out is set t o Down Sample On . Set t o Do wn Sample Off . ⢠As a cop y-pr ot ection measur e, some D VDs do not output 9 6 kHz audio. In this case, e v en if Do wn Sample Off is select ed, the pla yer aut oma tically output s the audio at 4 8 kHz. This is not a malfunction. No audio, or audio is dist or t ed. ⢠Some D VD discs do not output digit al audio. Switch your amplifier t o the pla yer's analog outputs. ⢠Dir t, dust, etc. on the disc. Clean the disc ( page 5 8 ). ⢠Inter connects are no t fully inserted int o the terminals (or ar e not connect ed). Check that all int erconnect s are firml y insert ed. ⢠Dir t y or oxidized plugs/t erminals. Clean the plugs/t erminals. ⢠Incorrect audio cable connection. Check the audio connections ( page s 1 0-1 2 ). ⢠Play er's output is connected t o the amplifier's phono (turnt able) inputs. Connect t o any set of input s except phono. ⢠The disc is paused. Pr ess 3 or 8 t o e xit the pause mode. ⢠Incorrect amplifier set tings. Check that the v olume is turned up, that the speak ers ar e on, the input function set corr ectly , etc. ⢠The Audio Out set ting is incorr ect. If ther e is no dialog fr om the fr ont L/R speaker s, set Audio Out t o 2 Channel. If there is no output fr om the rear , cent er and subwoofer speak ers, se t Audio Out t o 5.1 Channel ( page 4 3 ). ⢠The play er is set t o 5.1ch pla yback, but sound is onl y 2ch. Check that 2ch pla yback is not select ed in the discâ s menu. The analog audio is OK, but ther e appear s to be no digital audio signal. ⢠Incorrect Audio 1 menu se t tings. Make sur e that the Digital Out set ting is set t o On ( page 4 2 ). Check that the Dolb y Digital and DT S set tings are suit able for y our amplifierâÂÂcheck the amp's instruction manual.
64 En Additional Informa tion 8 The disc containing the MP3 tr acks wonâÂÂt pla y . ⢠If the disc is a recor dable CD, mak e sure that the disc is finalized. If the message âÂÂUNPLA Y ABLE MP3 FORMA Tâ is displa yed when y ou try to pla y a disc/ tr ack: Check that the tr ack(s) are in the MPEG1 Audio La yer 3 format. Check that the sampling r at e of the tr ack(s) are 4 4.1 or 4 8kHz. Some MP3 tr acks appear t o be missing fr om a disc. ⢠If a tr ack name does not end in âÂÂ.mp3â or âÂÂ.MP3â , this pla yer will not r ecognize it as an MP3 tr ack. ⢠This play er only r ecognizes the fir st 2 5 0 folders and tr acks on a disc. If there ar e more folder s/tr acks than this, y ou will not be able t o play them. ⢠This play er is not compatible with multi-session discs. If the disc is multi-session, y ou will only be able t o pla y tr acks r ecorded ont o the first se ssion. The audio r ecorded on the disc is not output pr operly . ⢠If the audio is switched t o [2] when playing a Super VCD that cont ains only one st er eo soundtr ack, there ma y be no sound at all. T o re st ore the sound, r eturn the A UDIO but t on back t o its original position ( page 26 ). Canâ t perform fr ame sear ch, or the frame number is not displa yed ⢠Check that the F rame Sear ch option is set t o On ( page 4 7 ). ⢠Y ou can only use fr ame search with D VD-V ideo discs. ⢠Fr ame numbers ar e only displa yed with D VD- Video discs, and only when the disc is paused or during fr ame advance/r ev er se. F r ame search doesnâÂÂt find the frame number input, or some fr ames ar e skipped when using fr ame advance. ⢠Y ou ma y experience this with discs r ecorded in 2 4 fr ames/second pr ogre ssive scan format. W ith these discs, the pla yer âÂÂmissesâ one fr ame every six fr ames. F or this r eason, the fr ame number s do not appear continuous when using fr ame advance, and it ma y not be possible t o displa y the ex act fr ame you sear ched for . The pla yer does no t actually dr op an y fr ames tha t ar e recor ded on the disc, how ev er . Noticeable differ ence in D VD and CD volume. ⢠D VDs and CDs use differ ent recording me thods. This is not a malfunction. Cannot pla y multi-channel audio ⢠Make sur e that 5.1 Channel is select ed in the Audio Out menu (page 4 3 ). ⢠Check that the set tings in the Speak er Set ting scr een ar e correct ( page 4 4 ). ⢠Check the audio options a v ailable from the discâ s menu. No digital audio output ⢠Check that Digital Out se t ting is set t o On ( page 42 ). ⢠Some D VD-Audio discs pr ohibit digital audio output. ⢠No digital audio is output when pla ying SA CDs. Cannot output 1 9 2kHz or 1 7 6.4kHz digital audio. The pla yer does no t output digital audio at these sampling r at es. Cannot output 96kHz or 8 8.2kHz digital audio. ⢠Check that the Linear PCM set ting is not set t o Down Sample On ( page 4 1 ). ⢠Some discs are digit al cop y prot ected and do no t output high sampling r at e digit al audio. No D TS audio output. ⢠If this unit is connected t o a non-D TS compaible amplifier or decoder using a digital audio cable, se t D TS Out t o DTS 3 PCM in the Setup menu. If y ou do not do this, noise will be output if y ou try and pla y a D TS disc. ⢠If this unit is connected t o a D TS-compatible amplifier or decoder using a digit al audio cable, check the amplifier set tings, and that the cable is pr operl y connect ed. Audio mix does not sound right or sounds incomplet e (for e xample, inaudible dialog). ⢠Incorrect Setup men u set tings. Make sur e that 2 Channel output is select ed for the Audio Out menu option if y ou've connect ed t o the st ereo inputs on y our amplifier or TV ( page 43 ). ⢠If the power is switched off befor e exiting the Setup menu, the set tings ar e not st ored. Make sur e that y ou e xit the Setup menu aft er changing an y set tings before switching off .
65 En 8 Additional Informa tion R e set ting the Play er Re set ting the play er re turns all menu, pictur e and passw ord se t tings to their fact ory defaults. 1 Switch the play er into st andby using the front panel ST ANDB Y/ON. 2 Hold down the fr ont panel 7 but t on and switch back on. All set tings will ha v e been cleared. Not e St atic electricit y or other e xt ernal influences ma y cause malfunctioning of this unit. In this case, unplug the po w er cord and then plug back in. This will usually r eset the unit for proper oper ation. If this does no t corr ect the problem, plea se consult y our near est Pioneer service cent er .
66 En Additional Informa tion 8 Country Input -Code Country-code AR GENTINA A USTR ALIA A USTRIA BEL GIUM BRAZIL CANAD A CHILE CHINA DENMARK FINLAND FRANCE GERMANY HONG K ONG INDIA INDONESIA IT AL Y JAP AN K OREA, REPUBLIC OF MALA Y SIA MEXICO NETHERLANDS NEW ZEALAND NOR W A Y P AKIST AN PHILIPPINES POR TUG AL R USSIAN FEDERA T ON SING APORE SP AIN SWITZERLAND SWEDEN T AIW AN, PR OVINCE OF CHINA THAILAND UNITED KINGDOM UNITED ST A TES OF AMERICA 01 1 8 01 21 01 2 0 0205 02 1 8 030 1 03 1 2 03 1 4 04 1 1 0609 06 1 8 04 05 08 1 1 09 1 4 0904 0 920 10 1 6 111 8 13 2 5 1 324 14 12 14 2 6 14 15 16 1 1 16 0 8 16 2 0 18 2 1 19 0 7 05 1 9 030 8 19 0 5 202 3 20 08 0702 21 1 9 ar au at be br ca cl cn dk fi fr de hk in id it jp kr my mx nl nz no pk ph pt ru sg es ch se tw th gb us Country Code List Language code list Language Code Japanese/japonais ( ja ) 1 00 1 English/anglais ( en ) 0 5 1 4 Fr ench ( fr) 0 6 1 8 German ( de ) 0 4 0 5 Italian ( it ) 0 9 2 0 Spanish ( es ) 0 5 1 9 Dutch ( nl ) 1 4 1 2 R ussian ( ru ) 1 8 2 1 Chinese ( zh ) 2 6 0 8 K orean ( k o ) 1 1 1 5 Greek ( el ) 0 5 1 2 Afar ( aa ) 0 1 0 1 Abkhazian ( ab ) 0 1 0 2 Afrikaans ( af ) 0 1 0 6 Amharic ( am ) 0 1 1 3 Ar abic ( ar ) 0 1 1 8 Assamese ( a s ) 0 1 1 9 Aymar a ( ay ) 0 1 2 5 Azerbaijani ( az ) 0 1 2 6 Bashkir ( ba ) 0 2 0 1 Byelorussian ( be ) 0 2 0 5 Bulgarian ( bg ) 0 2 0 7 Bihari ( bh ) 0 2 0 8 Bislama ( bi ) 0 2 0 9 Bengali ( bn ) 0 2 1 4 T ibet an ( bo ) 0 2 1 5 Bre ton ( br ) 0 2 1 8 Cat alan ( ca ) 0 3 0 1 Corsican ( co ) 0 3 1 5 Czech ( cs ) 0 3 1 9 W elsh ( cy ) 0 3 2 5 Danish ( da ) 04 0 1 Bhut ani ( dz ) 04 2 6 Esper anto ( eo ) 0 5 1 5 Est onian ( et ) 0 5 2 0 Basque ( eu ) 0 5 2 1 P ersian ( fa ) 0 60 1 Finnish ( fi ) 0 60 9 Fiji ( fj ) 0 6 1 0 F aroese ( fo ) 0 6 1 5 Frisian ( fy ) 0 6 2 5 Irish ( ga ) 0 7 0 1 Scots-Gaelic ( gd ) 0 7 04 Galician ( gl ) 0 7 1 2 Guar ani ( gn ) 0 7 1 4 Gujar ati ( gu ) 0 7 2 1
67 En 8 Additional Informa tion Language Code Hausa ( ha ) 0 8 0 1 Hindi ( hi ) 0 8 09 Croa tian (hr ) 0 8 1 8 Hungarian ( hu ) 0 8 2 1 Armenian ( h y ) 08 2 5 Int erlingua ( ia ) 0 9 0 1 Int erlingue ( ie ) 0 9 0 5 Inupiak ( ik ) 0 9 1 1 Indonesian ( in ) 0 9 1 4 Icelandic ( is ) 09 1 9 Hebre w ( iw ) 0 9 2 3 Y iddish ( ji ) 1 009 Ja vanese ( jw ) 1 02 3 Geor gian ( ka ) 1 1 0 1 Kazakh ( kk ) 1 1 1 1 Greenlandic ( kl ) 1 1 1 2 Cambodian ( km ) 1 1 1 3 Kannada ( kn ) 1 1 1 4 Ka shmiri ( ks ) 1 1 1 9 Kur dish ( ku ) 1 1 2 1 Kirghiz ( k y ) 1 1 2 5 Latin ( la ) 1 2 0 1 Lingala (ln ) 1 2 1 4 Laothian ( lo ) 1 2 1 5 Lithuanian ( lt ) 1 2 2 0 Latvian ( lv ) 1 2 2 2 Malagas y ( mg ) 1 3 0 7 Maori ( mi ) 1 3 0 9 Macedonian ( mk ) 1 3 1 1 Mala yalam ( ml ) 1 3 1 2 Mongolian ( mn ) 1 3 1 4 Moldavian ( mo ) 1 3 1 5 Mar athi ( mr ) 1 3 1 8 Mala y ( ms ) 1 3 1 9 Malt ese ( mt ) 1 3 2 0 Burmese ( m y ) 1 3 2 5 Nauru ( na ) 1 4 0 1 Nepali ( ne ) 1 4 0 5 Norwegian ( no ) 1 4 1 5 Occitan ( oc ) 1 5 0 3 Oromo ( om ) 1 5 1 3 Oriy a ( or ) 1 5 1 8 P anjabi ( pa ) 1 6 0 1 P olish ( pl ) 1 6 1 2 P asht o, Pushto ( ps ) 1 6 1 9 P ortuguese ( pt ) 1 6 2 0 Language Code Quechua ( qu ) 1 7 2 1 Rhaet o-Romanc e ( rm ) 1 8 1 3 Kirundi ( rn ) 1 8 1 4 R omanian ( r o ) 1 8 1 5 Kin y arw anda ( rw ) 1 8 2 3 Sanskrit ( sa ) 1 9 0 1 Sindhi ( sd ) 1 9 04 Sangho ( sg ) 1 9 0 7 Serbo-Cr oatian ( sh ) 1 90 8 Singhalese ( si ) 1 90 9 Slov ak ( sk ) 1 9 1 1 Slov enian ( sl ) 1 9 1 2 Samoan ( sm ) 1 9 1 3 Shona ( sn ) 1 9 1 4 Somali ( so ) 1 9 1 5 Albanian ( sq ) 1 9 1 7 Serbian ( sr ) 1 9 1 8 Siswa ti ( ss ) 1 9 1 9 Seso tho ( st ) 1 9 2 0 Sundanese ( su ) 1 9 2 1 Swedish ( sv ) 1 9 2 2 Swahili ( sw ) 1 9 2 3 T amil ( t a ) 2 00 1 T elugu ( t e ) 2 00 5 T ajik ( tg ) 2 00 7 Thai ( th ) 2 008 T igriny a ( ti ) 2 009 T urkmen ( tk ) 2 0 1 1 T agalog ( tl ) 2 0 1 2 Set swana ( tn ) 2 0 1 4 T onga ( t o ) 2 0 1 5 T urkish ( tr ) 2 0 1 8 T songa ( ts ) 2 0 1 9 T a t ar ( t t ) 2 02 0 T wi ( tw ) 2 0 2 3 Ukr ainian ( uk ) 2 1 1 1 Ur du ( ur ) 2 1 1 8 Uzbek ( uz ) 2 1 2 6 V ietnamese ( vi ) 2 2 0 9 V olapük ( vo ) 2 2 1 5 W olof ( wo ) 2 3 1 5 Xhosa ( xh ) 2 4 0 8 Y oruba ( yo ) 2 5 1 5 Zulu ( zu ) 2 6 2 1
68 En Additional Informa tion 8 When vie wing on a standar d TV or monit or 16:9 4:3 4:3 (Letter Box) 4:3 (Pan & Scan) The picture is shown in widescreen with black bars at the top and bottom of the screen. The sides of the picture are cropped so that the picture fills the whole screen. Screen format of disc Setting Appearance 16:9 (Wide) 4:3 (Letter Box) 4:3 (Pan & Scan) The picture is presented correctly on any setting. When vie wing on a widescr een TV or monit or 16:9 (Wide) The picture is presented in widescreen. 16:9 (Wide) 16:9 The picture is presented with black bars either side. Screen format of disc TV Setting Appearance 4:3 16:9 (Wide) Player Setting Full Normal Full Normal 4:3 16:9 (Compressed) (This setting only has any effect with progressive output.) Full The picture is squashed. Set to either Pan & Scan or Letter Box. The picture is squashed. Set your TV to âÂÂFullâÂÂ. The picture is stretched. Set your TV to âÂÂNormalâÂÂ. Choose this setting if you have a progressive scan-compatible TV and the aspect ratio cannot be changed. The picture is presented with black bars either side.
69 En 8 Additional Informa tion Specifications General Sy stem ... D VD- V ideo, D VD-Audio, D VD-R/R W , Super VCD, Video- CD, SA CD, CD and MP3 files P ow er requir ements D V - 4 7A ............................................................... 1 2 0 V , 60 Hz DV-73 3 A T aiwanese model ............................................ 1 1 0 V , 60 Hz Other models .............................. 2 2 0-2 4 0 V , 5 0/60 Hz P ower consumption .............................................................. 1 4 W P ow er consumption in st andb y mode D V - 4 7A ............................................................................ 0.3 W DV-73 3 A T aiwanese model ....................................................... 0.3 W Other models ............................................................. 0.5 W W eight D V - 4 7 A ..................................................... 4.2 kg (9 lb 4 oz) D V - 7 3 3A ........................................................................ 4.5 kg Dimensions D V -4 7A ....................... 4 2 0 (W) x 2 7 7 (D) x 9 7 .5 (H) mm (16 9 / 16 (W) x 10 15 / 16 (D) x 3 7 / 8 (H) in.) D V -7 3 3A .................... 4 2 0 (W) x 2 7 8 (D) x 9 7 .5 (H) mm Oper ating t empera ture ...... 5ðC to 3 5ðC ( 3 6ðF to 9 6ðF) Oper ating humidit y .............. 5% t o 85% (no condensa tion) S- V ideo output (2 individual outputs) Y (luminance) - Output lev el ............................. 1 Vp-p (7 5 â¦) C (color) - Output lev el ............................. 2 8 6 mVp-p (7 5 â¦) Jacks ........................................................................... S- VIDEO jack Video output (2 individual output s) Output lev el .......................................................... 1 Vp-p (7 5 â¦) Jacks ................................................................................... R CA jack Component video output (Y , P B , P R ) Output level ................................................ Y: 1.0 Vp-p (75 ⦠) P B , P R : 0.7 Vp-p (75 ⦠) Jacks ................................................................................. RCA jacks D1/D2 video output (D V -S7 3 3A only) Output level .................................................. Y: 1.0 Vp-p (75 â¦) P B , P R : 0.7 Vp-p (75 ⦠) Jacks ................................................................................ D terminal Audio output (2 pairs) Output lev el During audio output ................. 2 00 mV rms (1 kHz, âÂÂ2 0 dB) Number of channels ..................................................................... 2 Jacks ................................................................................... R CA jack Audio output (multi-channel / L, R, C, SW , LS, RS) Output lev el During audio output ................. 2 00 mV rms (1 kHz, âÂÂ2 0 dB) Number of channels ..................................................................... 6 Jacks ................................................................................... R CA jack Digital audio char ac t eristics Fr equency response .......... 4 Hz t o 44 kHz (D VD fs: 96 kHz) 4 Hz t o 8 8 kHz (D VD-Audio fs: 1 9 2 kHz) S/N r atio ............................................................................... 1 1 8 dB Dynamic r ange .................................................................... 1 08 dB T otal harmonic dist ortion .............................................. 0.00 1 % W ow and flut t er . Limit of measurement ( ñ 0.00 1% W . PEAK) or low er Digital output Optical digit al output .................................. Optical digit al jack Coaxial digital output .................................................... R CA jack Other t erminals Control in ............................................................ Minijack (3.5 ø) Control out ......................................................... Minijack (3.5 ø) Accessories Audio cable .................................................................................... 1 Video cable ..................................................................................... 1 Remo t e control unit ..................................................................... 1 â AA â size (R6P) bat teries ............................................................. 2 P ow er cord ...................................................................................... 1 Oper ating Instructions Note: The specifications and de sign of this product ar e subject to change without notice, due to impr ov ement.
70 En Additional Informa tion 8 We Want You LISTENING For A Lifetime Selecting fine audio equipment such as the unit youâÂÂve just purchased is only the start of your musical enjoyment. Now itâÂÂs time to consider how you can maximize the fun and excitement your equipment offers. This manufacturer and the Electronic Industries AssociationâÂÂs Consumer Electronics Group want you to get the most out of your equipment by playing it at a safe level. One that lets the sound come through loud and clear without annoying blaring or distortion-and, most importantly, without affecting your sensitive hearing. Sound can be deceiving. Over time your hearing âÂÂcomfort levelâ adapts to higher volumes of sound. So what sounds âÂÂnormalâ can actually be loud and harmful to your hearing. Guard against this by setting your equipment at a safe level BEFORE your hearing adapts. To establish a safe level: ⢠Start your volume control at a low setting. ⢠Slowly increase the sound until you can hear it comfortably and clearly, and without distortion. Once you have established a comfortable sound level: ⢠Set the dial and leave it there. Taking a minute to do this now will help to prevent hearing damage or loss in the future. After all, we want you listening for a lifetime. W e W ant Y ou Listening For A Lifetime Used wisely, your new sound equipment will provide a lifetime of fun and enjoyment. Since hearing damage from loud noise is often undetectable until it is too late, this manufacturer and the Electronic Industries AssociationâÂÂs Consumer Electronics Group recommend you avoid prolonged exposure to excessive noise. This list of sound levels is included for your protection. Decibel Level Example 30 Quiet library, soft whispers 40 Living room, refrigerator, bedroom away from traffic 50 Light traffic, normal conversation, quiet office 60 Air conditioner at 20 feet, sewing machine 70 Vacuum cleaner, hair dryer, noisy restaurant 80 Average city traffic, garbage disposals, alarm clock at two feet. THE FOLLOWING NOISES CAN BE DANGEROUS UNDER CONSTANT EXPOSURE 90 Subway, motorcycle, truck traffic, lawn mower 100 Garbage truck, chain saw, pneumatic drill 120 Rock band concert in front of speakers, thunderclap 140 Gunshot blast, jet plane 180 Rocket launching pad Information courtesy of the Deafness Research Foundation. We Want You LISTENING For A Lifetime EST 1924 EIA E L E C T R O N I C I N D U S T R I E S ⢠A S S O C I A T I O N ⢠EST 1924 EIA E L E C T R O N I C I N D U S T R I E S ⢠A S S O C I A T I O N â¢
71 En 8 Additional Informa tion
Printed in <VRB1278-A> <TWKZW/01J00000> Published by Pioneer Corporation. Copyright é 2001 Pioneer Corporation. All rights reserved. PIONEER CORPORATION 4-1, Meguro 1-Chome, Meguro-ku, Tokyo 153-8654, Japan PIONEER ELECTRONICS [USA] INC. P.O. BOX 1540, Long Beach, California 90801-1540, U.S.A. PIONEER ELECTRONICS OF CANADA, INC. 300 Allstate Parkway, Markham, Ontario L3R OP2, Canada PIONEER EUROPE NV Haven 1087, Keetberglaan 1, B-9120 Melsele, Belgium TEL: 03/570.05.11 PIONEER ELECTRONICS AUSTRALIA PTY. LTD. 178-184 Boundary Road, Braeside, Victoria 3195, Australia, TEL: [03] 9586-6300 PIONEER ELECTRONICS DE MEXICO S.A. DE C.V. San Lorenzo 1009 3er Piso Desp. 302 Col. Del Valle Mexico D.F. C.P. 03100 TEL: 5-688-52-90
2 En
3 En [For U.S. model] IMPORTANT NOTICE H006AEn The serial number for this equipment is located in the rear panel. Please write this serial number on your enclosed warranty card and keep it in a secure area. This is for your security.
4 En This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation, and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited. CONGRA TULA TIONS ON YOUR PURCHASE OF THIS FINE PIONEER PRODUCT . Pioneer is on the leading edge of DVD research for consumer products and this unit incorporates the latest technological developments. We are sure you will be fully satisfied with the DVD player . Thank you for your support. Please read through these operating instructions so you will know how to operate your model properly . After you have finished reading the instructions, put them away in a safe place for future reference. ⢠This player is not suitable for commercial use. On the bonnet of the unit. W ARNING: Slot and openings in the cabinet are pro- vided for ventilation and to ensure reliable operation of the product and to protect it from overheating, to pre- vent fire hazard, the openings should never be blocked and covered with items, such as newspapers, table- cloths, curtains, etc. Also do not put the apparatus on the thick carpet, bed, sofa, or fabric having a thick pile. H040 En Operating Environment H045 En Operating environment temperature and humidity: 5ðC â 35ðC ( 41ðF â 95ðF); less than 85%RH (cooling vents not blocked) Do not install in the following locations ÷ Location exposed to direct sunlight or strong artificial light ÷ Location exposed to high humidity, or poorly ventilated location
5 En T able Of Cont ents 1 Before Y ou Start F eatures ............................................................................. 6 Whatâ s in the box ............................................................ 7 Put ting the bat t eries in the r emote contr ol ............. 7 Using the remot e control ............................................. 7 Discs compatible with this pla yer .............................. 8 D VD V ideo regions ......................................................... 9 MP3 compatibilit y information ................................... 9 2 Connecting Up Easy Setup ..................................................................... 1 0 Home theat er video connections ............................. 1 1 Home theat er audio connections ............................. 1 2 3 Contr ols & Display s Disp lay ............................................................................. 1 3 Remot e control ............................................................. 1 4 Fr ont panel ..................................................................... 1 5 4 Get ting Start ed Set ting the TV Sy stem (ex cept for T aiwanese model) ................................... 1 6 Using the Setup Na vigat o r ......................................... 1 7 Playing discs ................................................................. 2 0 Naviga ting DVD disc menus ....................................... 2 2 Na vigating Super VCD/V ideo CD PBC menus ...... 2 2 Naviga ting DVD-R W discs menus ............................. 2 2 5 Playing Discs Introduction ................................................................... 2 3 Finding what y ou want on a disc .............................. 2 3 Using the Multi Dial ..................................................... 2 4 Switching camer a angles ............................................. 2 5 Switching subtitles ....................................................... 2 5 Switching audio language ........................................... 2 6 Switching audio channel (D VD-Audio) ................... 2 6 Switching audio channel (D VD-R W/Super VCD/V ideo CD/CD/MP3) ........ 2 6 Making a progr am list .................................................. 2 7 Progr amming tips .......................................................... 2 8 Using random pla y ...................................................... 2 9 Using repeat pla y ........................................................ 3 0 Bookmarking a place in a disc (LAST MEMOR Y) .......................................................... 3 1 Memorizing disc set tings (CONDITION MEMOR Y) ........................................... 3 2 Using setup menu shortcuts (FUNCTION MEMOR Y) .............................................. 3 3 Displa ying disc information ....................................... 3 4 6 Playing MP3s Playing MP3s ................................................................. 3 5 Sear ching for folders and tr acks ............................... 3 6 Using random pla y ....................................................... 3 6 Using repeat pla y ......................................................... 3 6 Displa ying MP3 information ...................................... 3 6 Using the MP3 Na vigat or ........................................... 3 7 Making a pr ogr am list of MP3 tr acks ....................... 3 8 7 D VD Setup Menu Using the Setup menu ................................................. 3 9 Setup Menu Mode ........................................................ 3 9 OSD Set tings ................................................................ 4 0 Audio set tings ............................................................... 4 0 Video set tings ................................................................ 4 7 Language set tings ......................................................... 5 2 Gener al set tings ............................................................ 5 5 8 Additional Information Handling discs ............................................................... 5 8 Storing discs .................................................................. 5 8 Discs to a void ................................................................ 5 8 Cleaning the pickup lens ............................................ 5 8 Problems with condensa tion ..................................... 5 8 Hints on installation .................................................... 5 9 Moving the pla yer ......................................................... 5 9 Glossary ......................................................................... 6 0 T r oubleshooting ............................................................ 6 2 Rese t ting the Play er .................................................... 6 5 Country Code List ....................................................... 6 6 Language code list ...................................................... 6 6 Specifications ............................................................... 6 9
6 En Befor e Y ou St ar t 1 F eatur es 5 2 5 line digital progr essive-scan component video output Compar ed t o standar d interlaced video, pr ogressiv e scan effectiv el y doubles the amount of video information fed to y our TV or monit or . The re sult is a stable, flicker -fr ee image. (Check y our TV/monitor for compat - ibilit y with this featur e.) F or the v ery highest picture qualit y , try wa tching a movie on D VD- V ideo on a progr es- siv e-scan compatible TV . What is Super VCD? (D V -S7 3 3A only) Logos: This pla y er suppor ts the IECâ s Super VCD st andar d. Compar ed to the V ideo CD st andar d, Super VCD offer s superior pictur e quality , and allow s tw o st er eo soundtr acks to be r ecorded. Super VCD also supports the widescr een size. Superlativ e audio performance with D VD-Audio, Dolb y* 1 Digit al and DT S *2 soft war e Logos: 1 R The D V -4 7A/D V -S7 3 3A deliv er s br eatht aking sound qualit y with Dolby Digital and D TS discs. T ruSurr ound *3 Logo: When used with st ereo sour ces, T ruSurround cr ea te s a r ealistic surround-sound effect using just t wo speak ers (see page 4 2 ). MP3 compatibilit y This pla yer is compatible with CD-R, CD-R W and CD-R OM discs that contain MP3 audio tr acks (see pages 9, 3 5 ). V ideo Adjust This new t ype of DNR (Digital Noise Reduction) for encoding video enable s you t o adjust the video set tings on a mor e det ailed and e xact lev el. Ther e ar e thr ee possible set tings t o choose fr om. These include: TV (CR T), PDP , and Profe ssional. This t echnology can r emember which set ting y ou'v e chosen and emplo y it at the proper time. (see page 49). Legat o PR O (Legat o Link Con ver sion PR O) The Legat o PR O digital filter r est ore s some of the high-frequency information lost in the CD and D VD r ecor ding and mast ering proce ss by upsampling from 4 4.1kHz t o 1 7 6.4kHz for CD and from 4 8kHz t o 1 9 2kHz for D VD. Legat o PR O has four set tings, including Standar d and three effect set tings. Y ou can also switch it off. (see page 45 ). Hi-Bit Hi-Bit ext ends the dynamic range of the main fr ont speaker s b y effectively incr easing the bit depth fr om 1 6-2 0 bit to 2 4 bit. This allow s the play er t o re veal grea t er det ail in lo w lev el audio (see page 4 5 ). High qualit y 2 4-bit/1 9 2kHz D A C The high specification 2 4-bit/1 9 2kHz D AC deliver s dynamic, smooth and e xpansiv e analog sound fr om CDs and D VDs. Gr aphical Setup Na vigat or Set ting up y our D VD play er is eas y using the gr aphical Setup Naviga tor . Answer the questions that appear on-scr een and the Setup Naviga t or makes the necessary audio, video and language set tings for you (see page 17 ).
7 En 1 Befor e Y ou St ar t * 1 Manufactur ed under license from Dolb y Labor at ories. âÂÂDolb yâ and the double-D s ymbol ar e tr ademarks of Dolb y Labora torie s. Confidential unpublished w orks. é 1 9 9 2- 1 99 7 Dolb y Labor at ories. All rights r e serv ed. * 2 âÂÂD TSâ and âÂÂDTS Digit al Surroundâ ar e r egist er ed tr ademarks of Digit al Theat er Sy st ems, Inc. * 3 T ruSurround and the î s ymbol are tr ademarks of SRS Labs, Inc. T ruSurround t echnology is incorpor at ed under license fr om SR S Labs, Inc. Whatâ s in the bo x Thank you for bu ying this Pioneer prod- uct. Please confirm tha t the following accessorie s ar e in the bo x when y ou open it. ⢠Remot e control ⢠AA/R6P dry cell bat t eries x2 ⢠Ster eo audio cable (red/whit e) ⢠Video cable (yello w) ⢠P o wer cable ⢠These oper ating instructions Put ting the bat t eries in the r emot e contr ol 1 Open the bat t ery compar tment co v er on the back of the remot e control. 2 Inser t t wo AA/R6P bat t erie s int o the bat - t er y compar tment following the indica tions ( ê, ÷ ) inside the compar tment. 3 Close the cov er . Not e Incorr ect use of bat t eries can re sult in hazards such as leak age and bur sting. Please observ e the following: ⢠Donâ t mix new and old ba t t eries t ogether . ⢠Donâ t use different kinds of ba t t ery to- getherâÂÂalthough the y ma y look similar , differ ent bat t eries ma y ha ve differ ent v olt ages. ⢠Make sur e that the plus and minus ends of each bat t ery match the indications in the bat tery compartment. ⢠Remo v e bat terie s from equipment that isnâÂÂt going t o be used for a month or mor e. When disposing of used bat t eries, please comply with go v ernmental r egula tions or envir onmental public instructionâ s rules tha t apply in y our country or ar ea. H0 4 8 En Using the r emot e contr ol K eep in mind the following when using the remo te contr ol: ⢠Make sur e that there ar e no obstacle s bet ween the r emot e and the remo te sensor on the unit. ⢠Use within the oper ating r ange and angle, as sho wn. ⢠Remot e oper ation ma y become unreliable if str ong sunlight or fluor escent light is shining on the unitâ s remo t e sensor . ⢠Remot e contr ollers for differ ent devices can int er fer e with each other . A v oid using r emot es for other equipment loca ted close t o this unit. ⢠Replace the bat terie s when you notice a fall off in the oper ating r ange of the r emot e. 30 30 7m (23 feet)
8 En Befor e Y ou St ar t 1 Discs compatible with this pla y er An y disc that displa ys one of the follo wing logos should pla y in this play er . Other format s, including D VD-RAM, D VD-R OM, CD-R OM (ex cept those tha t contain MP3 files) and Pho to CD will no t pla y . D VD Video compa tibilit y: ⢠Logos: ⢠Single-sided or double-sided discs ⢠Single la y er or dual la yer discs ⢠Dolb y Digit al, D TS, MPEG or Linear PCM digit al audio ⢠MPEG-2 digital video Discs ar e generall y divided int o one or more titles . T itles ma y be further subdivided int o chapters . D VD Audio compatibilit y: ⢠Logos: ⢠Single sided discs ⢠Single la y er or dual la yer discs ⢠Linear or packed PCM digit al audio ⢠Some discs ma y cont ain MPEG-2 video, and Dolb y Digital, D TS or MPEG digital audio Discs ar e generall y divided int o one or more gr oups . Groups ma y be fur ther subdivided int o tr acks . D VD-R compatibilit y (D V -S7 3 3A only): This unit can pla y D VD-R discs. Please not e the follo wing points when using the se discs: ⢠Logo: ⢠This unit can pla y D VD-R discs r ecor ded as D VD video format. D VD-R W compatibilit y (D V -S7 3 3A only): This unit can pla y D VD-R W discs. Please not e the follo wing points when using the se discs: ⢠Logo: ⢠This unit can pla y D VD-R W discs recor ded as D VD video format or D VD video recor ding format. ⢠D VD-RW discs tha t wer e recor ded with cop y- once only permission canno t be play ed. The message, âÂÂCOP Y PR O TECT PR OGRAM, UNPLA Y ABLEâ appears in the displa y during these parts of the disc. ⢠When pla ying a D VD-R W disc that w as edit ed on a D VD r ecor der , the screen ma y go moment arily black a t the edit ed point. ⢠When pla ying a D VD-R W disc that w as edit ed on a D VD r ecorder , you ma y see scenes from just befor e the edit ed point. ⢠Up to 2 0 char act ers of a title name can be displa yed. Audio CD compatibilit y: ⢠Logos: ⢠1 2cm (5in.) or 8cm (3in.) discs ⢠Linear PCM digital audio ⢠CD-Audio, CD-R* and CD-R W* format s CDs ar e divided int o tracks. *This unit can pla y CD-R and CD-R W discs recor ded in CD Audio or V ideo CD format, or with MP3 audio files. V ideo CD compatibilit y: ⢠Logo: ⢠1 2cm (5in.) or 8cm (3in.) discs ⢠MPEG-1 digital audio ⢠MPEG-1 digital video V ideo CDs are divided int o tracks . Super VCD compatibilit y: ⢠Logo: ⢠1 2cm (5in.) or 8cm (3in.) discs ⢠MPEG-1 digital audio ⢠MPEG-2 digital video Super VCDs ar e divided int o tr acks . S A CD compatibility: ⢠Logo: ⢠Single la yer , dual la yer or Hyblid la yer ⢠1 2cm (5in.) or 8cm (3in.) discs ⢠Digital audio (DSD) SA CDs ar e divided int o tracks .
9 En 1 Befor e Y ou St ar t Caution! ⢠D VD-R/R W and CD-R/R W discs r ecorded using a personal comput er or a D VD or CD r ecor der ma y not pla y if the disc is damaged or dirty , or if ther e is dirt or condensa tion on the pla yerâ s lens. ⢠If you r ecord a disc using a personal comput er , ev en if it is recor ded in a compatible format, ther e are cases in which it ma y not play because of the set tings of the application soft w ar e used t o crea te the disc. (Check with the soft ware publisher for mor e det ailed information.) ⢠Unfinalized D VD-R/R W discs cannot be pla y ed. ⢠Unfinalized CD-R/R W discs can be pla yed, but not all time information (pla ying time, e tc.) will be displa yed. ⢠F or more information on using D VD-R/R W and CD-R/R W discs, see Handling discs st ar ting on page 5 8 . D VD V ideo r egions All D VD V ideo discs carry a r egion mark on the case some where that indica t es which r egion(s) of the w orld the disc is compatible with. Y our D VD player also ha s a r egion mark, which y ou can find on the rear panel. Discs fr om incompatible regions will no t play in this pla y er . Discs mark ed ALL will pla y in an y pla yer . MP3 compatibilit y information ⢠The CD-R OM must be ISO 9 6 60 compatible. ⢠Files should be MPEG1 Audio La yer 3 format, 4 4.1 or 4 8kHz. Incompatible files will not pla y and âÂÂUNPLA Y ABLE MP3 FORMA Tâ will be displa yed. ⢠Not compatible with some variable bit -r a t e (VBR) files. ⢠VBR files ma y not show pla y times correctl y . ⢠This pla yer only play s tr acks that ar e named with the file ext ension âÂÂ.mp3â or âÂÂ.MP3â . ⢠This pla y er is not compatible with multi-session discs. If you try and pla y a multi-se ssion disc, only the first session will be pla yed. ⢠Use CD-R or CD-RW media for r ecor ding y our MP3 files. The disc must be finalized in or der t o pla y . ⢠Audio encoded at 1 2 8Kbps should sound close t o regular audio CD qualit y . Although this pla yer will pla y lower bit -r a t e MP3 tr acks, the sound qualit y becomes noticeabl y wor se at low er bit - ra te s . ⢠Only the first 8 char acter s of folder and tr ack names (ex cluding the âÂÂ.mp3â ext ension) are displa yed. ⢠This pla yer can r ecognize a maximum of 2 5 0 folders and 2 5 0 tr acks. Discs cont aining more than 2 5 0 folder s or tr acks will pla y , but only the fir st 2 5 0 folders/tr acks.
10 En Connecting Up 2 Eas y Setup This eas y setup is the minimum set of connec- tions you need to start wa tching D VD video discs. Both sound and picture ar e fed dir ectly to y our TV using the supplied audio and video cables. F or other possible connections, see pages 1 1 and 1 2 . Connecting audio and video cables Be sure t o inser t each plug fully for the best connection. The plugs and jacks ar e colour - coded t o mak e connection easier . Connecting control cable s Use a ster eo mini-plug cable (not supplied) t o connect the CONTR OL OUT of y our Pioneer amplifier/r eceiver t o the CONTR OL IN of this unit. This allo w s you to oper at e this unit with the amplifier/r eceiv erâ s r emot e control. See the instruction manual that came with your amplifier/r eceiver for mor e detailed instruc- tions. Add mor e components t o the chain by connecting the CONTR OL OUT of this unit to the CONTR OL IN of other Pioneer compo- nents. Impor tant ⢠In order t o properl y ground this pla yer , y ou must connect at lea st one cable (not including an optical cable) in addition t o the contr ol cable. ⢠If the CONTR OL IN jack on the pla yerâ s rear panel is connect ed to the CONTR OL OUT jack of another Pioneer component, point the r emot e contr ol at the o ther component t o oper at e the pla yer . Impor tant Befor e making or changing any rear panel connec- tions, make sure that all components are switched off and unplug ged fr om the wall outlet. AC IN VIDEO OUT S-VIDEO OUT D1 / D2 OPTICAL IN OUT COAXIAL SUB WOOFER CENTER SURROUND FRONT 1 P R P B Y 2 1 1 2 L L R R 2 AUDIO OUT (5.1CH) DIGITAL OUT CONTROL AUDIO OUT (2CH) COMPONENT VIDEO OUT VIDEO OUT 1 23 AC IN Connect t o a composite video input on y our TV using the supplied yello w video cable. Plug int o a st andard A C wall outle t. Connect t o a pair of st ereo audio input s on y our TV using the supplied r ed/whit e st ereo audio cable. Ther e is no D- V ideo jack on the D V -4 7A. D V -4 7A AC Inlet. D V -S7 3 3A
11 En 2 Connecting Up Home theat er video connec tions This pla yer output s video in a number of differ ent w a y s. Choose the one most suitable for your s y stem using the guide belo w . Connecting D V ideo and S- V ideo cables D V ideo (D V -S7 3 3A onl y) and S- V ideo cables will only plug in one w a y , so mak e sure the plug is correctl y lined up with the jack before inser ting. Be sur e t o fully insert for a good connection. S- Video or composit e video? S- V ideo should giv e a bet t er pictur e, so if you hav e an S- Video input, use it. S- V ideo cable s are a vailable fr om any good audio/visual dealer . Impor tant Before making or changing an y r ear panel connec- tions, mak e sur e that all components ar e switched off and unplugged from the w all outlet. AC IN VIDEO OUT S-VIDEO OUT D1 / D2 OPTICAL IN OUT COAXIAL SUB WOOFER CENTER SURROUND FRONT 1 P R P B Y 2 1 1 2 L L R R 2 AUDIO OUT (5.1CH) DIGITAL OUT CONTROL AUDIO OUT (2CH) COMPONENT VIDEO OUT VIDEO OUT 1 2 AC IN If your TV ha s a component video input, we r ecommend using it t o connect directly t o the COMPONENT VIDEO OUT of this pla yer . Use the standar d 3-jack component video ouput (D V - S7 3 3A only: y ou can also use the D1/D2 D- V ideo jack). If a component input is no t a vailable t o y ou, connect this pla yer t o your TV or A V receiv er using either the VIDEO or S- VIDEO jacks. D V -S7 3 3A D V -4 7A A C Inlet.
12 En Connecting Up 2 AC IN VIDEO OUT S-VIDEO OUT D1 / D2 OPTICAL IN OUT COAXIAL SUB WOOFER CENTER SURROUND FRONT 1 P R P B Y 2 1 1 2 L L R R 2 AUDIO OUT (5.1CH) DIGITAL OUT CONTROL AUDIO OUT (2CH) COMPONENT VIDEO OUT VIDEO OUT 1 2 3 4 AC IN COAX OPTICAL Connecting analog audio cables Be sure t o fully inser t each plug for the best connection. The plugs and jacks are colour - coded to mak e connection easier . Connecting optical cables Optical inter connects only plug in one wa y , so make sur e the plug is correctl y lined up with the jack before inser t - ing. When inser ting the plug, the pro tectiv e shut ter will open and y ou should hear it click int o position when fully inser ted. Be careful that y ou do not for ce the plug, because this could r esult in damage t o the pro tectiv e shut ter , the cable, or the unit itself . If y our amplifier has ster eo inputs only , connect them here. Connect to the coaxial or optical input of y our amplifier , if it has digit al inputs. Plug int o a standar d AC wall outlet. If your amplifier has 5.1 channel analog inputs, connect them here. Connect t o the FR ONT L (left)/R (right), SURR OUND L/R, CENTER and SUB W OOFER inputs of your amplifier . Home theat er audio connec tions This play er outputs multi-channel audio in both analog and digital form. Check the manual for your amplifier/r eceiver t o see what equipment it is compatible with (especially which digital forma tsâÂÂDolb y Digital, D TS, etc.âÂÂit can decode). Impor tant Befor e making or changing any rear panel connec- tions, make sure that all components are switched off and unplug ged fr om the wall outlet. Connecting coaxial cables Use an int er connect with a pin-t ype (also called R CA or phono) plug on each end to connect up digital coaxial-t ype jacks. Mak e sure that the plug is pushed fully home. No t e If you listen t o multichannel D VD-Audio thr ough one of the digital outputs, it will be downmix ed t o ster eo. Also, high sampling r at e D VD-Audio (1 9 2kHz or 1 7 6.4kHz) will be downsampled t o 9 6kHz, 8 8.2kHz, 4 8kHz or 4 4.1kHz, depending on the disc. Multi channel and high sampling ra te D VD-Audio is only av ailable through the analog outputs. Some D VD-Audio and all S ACD audio is output only through the analog outputs. D V -S7 3 3A There is no D- Video jack on the DV - 47 A . D V -4 7A AC Inlet.
13 En 3 Contr ols & Display s Displa y 1 VCD â Lights when a Super VCD/V ideo CD is loaded 2 GUI â Lights when an on-scr een menu is being displa yed 3 D VD â Lights when a D VD is loaded 4 D VD-A â Lights when a D VD-Audio disc is pla ying 5 Lights during r epeat pla y 6V â Lights during pla yback of the video par t of D VD discs 7 Lights during a multi-angle section of a D VD- V ideo disc 8 L, C, R, LS, S, R S, LFE â show which channels are r ecorded on the disc pla ying 5.1CH â Lights when the audio ouput is set t o 5.1 channel 9 T O T AL â Indicat es that the time sho wn in the char act er displa y is the t ot al pla ying time of the disc 10 3 â Lights when a disc is pla ying 11 8 â Light s wheh a disc is paused 1 2 LAST â Light s when the disc has a book - mark memory (see page 3 1 ) 1 3 COND. â Lights when the disc ha s had pr efer ences se t (see page 3 2 ) 1 4 REMAIN â Indicat es tha t the time sho wn in the char act er display is the r emaining pla ying time of the disc 1 5 PR OGRESSIVE â Lights when unit is outputing 5 2 5 line progr essiv e scan (non- int erlaced) video. 1 6 DO WNMIX â Lights when multi-channel D VD-Audio, Dolb y Digital, D TS or MPEG audio is do wnmixed, for e xample t o t wo channel st ereo 17 2 DIGIT AL â Lights when a disc with Dolb y Digital audio is pla ying 1 8 GRP â Indicat es that the n umber belo w in the char act er displa y is a D VD-Audio gr oup number 1 9 TITLE â Indicat es tha t the number belo w in the char act er displa y is a D VD- V ideo title number 2 0 S A CD â Lights when a Super Audio CD (SA CD) is loaded 2 1 CD â Lights when a CD is loaded 2 2 TRK â Indicat es tha t the number below in the char act er displa y is a D VD-Audio, CD, Super VCD/V ideo CD or MP3 tr ack number 2 3 CHP â Indicat es that the number belo w in the char act er display is a D VD- V ideo chapt er number 2 4 Char ac t er display 25 Lights when a disc with D TS audio is playing 26 Lights when pla ying a disc with T ruSurround switched on @ $ # 19 7 8 6 5 3 4 20 = ~! - á _ ) ( ^ % * &
14 En Contr ols & Display s 3 R emot e contr ol àDVD PLA YER SEARCH MODE STEP / SLOW RETURN PREVIOUS NEXT REV FWD P AUSE PLA Y VIDEO ADJUST DIMMER JOG MODE TOP MENU SET UP DISPLAY AUDIO SUBTITLE ANGLE OPEN / CLOSE FUNCTION MEMORY STOP PROGRAM CONDITION MEMORY LAST MEMORY REPEAT RANDOM 0 9 8 7 10 6 5 4 C 3 2 1 CLEAR MENU ENTER V .ADJ FL F .MEM JOG 8 73 A-B 4â 1 eE á ( * ! ç % ) 8 * ~ 0 ^ ⢠_ á â â ã ö = # - 9 & * * * @ 4 * 5 7 6 3 $ 2 * 1 1 MENU â page 2 2 2 â switches pla yer on or int o standb y . 3 A UDIO â page 26 4 DISPLA Y â pages 3 4, 3 6 5 SETUP â pages 1 7 , 3 9 6 MUL TI DIAL â page 2 4 7 LIGHTING â pr ess t o illuminat e but t ons 8, 9, 1 0, 1 1, 2 3, 2 5, 2 6 8 V .ADJ â V ideo adjust ( page 49 ) 9 F .MEM â Function memory (page 3 3 ) 10 3 â Pla y 11 7 â St op 12 4â â Skip 13 â R eturn 14 eE â Fr ame advance/slo w motion 1 5 Number but t ons â page s 2 1, 2 2 CONDITION MEMORY LAST MEMORY VOLUME CHANNEL TV CONTROL LAST Vol CH FUNC CH â Vol â COND. àTV ⢠ê $ ö 1 6 R ANDOM â pages 2 9, 3 6 1 7 LAST MEMOR Y â page 3 1 18 0 â Disc tr a y open/close 1 9 SUBTITLE â page 2 5 2 0 ANGLE â page 2 5 2 1 T OP MENU â page 2 2 2 2 Joy stick / ENTER but t on â page 2 2 23 F L â Pr ess t o change the displa y brightness 2 4 Jog indicat or â light s when multi dial is in jog mode ( page 2 4 ) 2 5 JOG â page 2 4 26 8 â P ause 27 1á â Scan 2 8 SEARCH MODE â page 2 3 2 9 C â Clear 3 0 PROGR AM â pages 2 7 , 3 8 3 1 REPEA T â A-B â page 3 0 3 2 CONDITION MEMOR Y â page 3 2 3 3 TV CONTR OL but t ons V OLUME â Use t o adjust the v olume. CHANNEL â Use t o select TV channel. FUNC â Pr ess FUNC t o select the TV for r emot e contr ol oper ation. 34 TV but t on â Pre ss TV t o turn the TVâ s pow er on or put in st andb y . Set ting up the Remot e Contr ol t o TV (D V -4 7A only) This most be set t o use but t ons 33 and 34 . 1. Input the Manufac tur er code. While holiding down the CLEAR but t on, input the t wo digit code fr om the table ne xt page that corr esponds t o the make of your TV . F or e xample, If y ou ha ve a Pioneer TV , pr ess and hold CLEAR, then pr ess 0, 0 on the remo t e contr ol. 2. Confirm that the TV is r esponding t o the progr ammed code. On the r emot e, pr ess the TV but t on. If the TV swithches on (or int o st andb y if it wa s on pr e viously), then you ha ve the corr ect code. If nothing happens when y ou pre ss the TV but t on, st ar t again fr om st ep 1 using a different code. ⢠Some Manufactur ers ha ve se ver al codes. T ry each one until you find the one tha t works. D V -S7 3 3A D V -4 7A
15 En 3 Contr ols & Display s F r ont panel 1 S T ANDB Y/ON 2 Disc tr a y 3 DIGIT AL D A T A OFF indicat or â Switche s the digit al output on/off . When switched off , the indicat or lights (see page 4 2 ) 4 LEGA T O PR O indicat or â page 4 5 5 FL OFF indicat or â Lights when the displa y is switched off using the FL DIMMER but t on 6 Displa y â page 1 3 0 8 7 áâ 41 3 STANDBY/ON FL OFF LEGATO PRO DIGITAL DAT A OFF à1 2~ 0 9 8 - 67 = 5 4 3 7 R emot e control sensor 8 0 â Disc tr a y open/close 9 41 â R ev er se scan/skip 10 áâ â F orwar d scan/skip 11 7 â St op 12 8 â P ause 13 3 â Pla y 1 4 FL DIMMER â Pr ess t o change the displa y brightness 0 8 7 áâ 41 3 àSTANDBY/ON FL DIMMER FL OFF 1 2~ 0 9 8 - 67 = ! 5 Code Manufacturer PIONEER 1 RCA 1 SHARP 3 ZENITH 1 SONY TOSHIBA 1 HIT ACHI 1 PHILIPS P ANASONIC 1 MITSUBISHI GOLDST AR 1 GE 1 MAGNA VOX 1 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 Code Manufacturer JVC 1 SANYO 2 RCA 2 RCA 3 RCA 4 RCA 5 SHARP 1 ZENITH 2 SANYO 1 P ANASONIC 2 GOLDST AR 2 HIT ACHI 2 HIT ACHI 3 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 Code Manufacturer TOSHIBA 2 SHARP 2 GE 2 MAGNA VOX 2 TOSHIBA 3 HIT ACHI 4 JVC 2 FUJITSU PIONEER 2 GRANDIENTE 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 Pr ese t Code List D V -4 7A D V -S7 3 3A
16 En Get ting St ar t ed 4 Se t ting the TV Sy st em (e x cept for T aiwane se model) The default set ting of this pla y er is AU T O , and unless y ou notice that the pictur e is distort ed when playing some discs, y ou should lea ve it se t to AU T O . If y ou e xperience pictur e distortion with some discs, set the TV s y st em t o match your country or r egionâ s s y st em. Doing this, how ev er , may r estrict the kinds of disc you can w atch. The t able below sho w s wha t kinds of disc are compa tible with each set ting ( AU T O , PA L and NTSC ). About MOD. (Modulation) P AL ⢠SHRINK Most models of the newl y dev eloped countdown P AL TV s yst em det ect 5 0 Hz (P AL)/6 0 Hz (NTSC) and aut omaticall y switch v ertical amplitude, r esulting in a displa y without v ertical shrinkage. ⢠If your P AL TV does no t hav e a V -Hold control, you ma y not be able t o vie w NTSC disc because the picture ma y roll. If the TV has a V -Hold contr ol, adjust it until the picture stops r olling. On some TVs, the picture ma y shrink vertically , lea ving black bands at the t op and bot t om of the scr een. This is not a malfunction; it is caused by the NTSC ] P AL conv er sion. Not e This fr ont panel is for the D V -S7 3 3A. The but tons ar e the same for the D V -4 7A. 1 Switch the pla yer int o standb y . 2 Hold down áâ then pr ess S T ANDB Y/ ON t o switch the TV sy st em. The TV sy stem changes as follow s: AU T O ] NTSC NTSC ] PA L PA L ] AU T O The display indicat es the new set ting. Not e that you ha ve t o switch the play er int o standb y before each change. áâ STANDBY/ON 0 8 7 áâ 41 3 STANDBY/ON FL OFF LEGATO PRO DIGITAL DATA OFF àDisc Output format Position of TV SYSTEM switch Type Format NTSC PAL AUTO DVD NTSC NTSC MOD. PAL NTSC PAL PAL PAL Video CD NTSC NTSC MOD. PAL NTSC PAL PAL PAL NTSC Super VCD NTSC NTSC MOD. PAL NTSC PAL PAL PAL SACD NTSC PAL NTSC or PAL CD, No disc NTSC PAL NTSC or PAL
17 En 4 Get ting St ar t ed àDVD PLA YER SET UP STOP ENTER 7 Using the Setup Na vigat or Befor e pla ying an y discs, w e strongly r ecommend using the Setup Na viga t or . This make s all the basic D VD play er set tings for y ou. 1 Pre ss S T ANDB Y/ON t o switch on. Also turn on your TV and mak e sur e that it is set t o the correct video input. ⢠The but t on on the remo te switche s the pla yer be t ween st andby and on. ⢠If a disc thatâ s alread y loaded start s to pla y , pre ss 7 t o st op it. 2 Pre ss SETUP . The Setup Na vigator on-scr een display (OSD) appear s: General A2 V2 Language Audio1 Video1 Exit Move Select Setup using the Setup Navigator Setup Navigator Setup Navigator Start Auto Start Off SETUP ENTER Navigat e all of the following OSDs using the se contr ols: Jo y stick up/down â cur sor up/do wn ENTER â select the highlight ed menu option Jo y stick left â go back t o the pre vious question. The contr ol possibilities for the current OSD ar e shown at the bot t om of each scr een. 3 Selec t âÂÂStar tâ . General A2 V2 Language Audio1 Video1 Exit Move Select Setup using the Setup Navigator Setup Navigator Setup Navigator Start Auto Start Off SETUP ENTER R emember Pr ess ENTER t o select an option. ⢠If you decide y ou donâ t want t o use the Setup Na vigat or , select Aut o Start Off here inst ead. Not e This r emot e is for the D V - S7 3 3A. The but tons ar e the same for the D V -4 7A.
18 En Get ting St ar t ed 4 7 If you select ed 5.1 Channel audio con- nec tions in st ep 6, confirm which speak - er s ar e connec t ed t o your amplifier . General A2 V2 Language Audio1 Video1 Exit Move Select Center speaker is connected to an amplifier Setup Navigator Center Speaker Amp Connection Present Dolby Digital/DTS Not Present SETUP ENTER General A2 V2 Language Audio1 Video1 Exit Move Select Surround speakers are connected to an amplifier Setup Navigator Surround Speakers Amp Connection Present Dolby Digital/DTS Not Present SETUP ENTER General A2 V2 Language Audio1 Video1 Exit Move Select Sub â woofer is connected to an amplifier Setup Navigator SubâÂÂwoofer Amp Connection Present Dolby Digital/DTS Not Present SETUP ENTER 8 Confirm the digital audio forma ts your amplifier is compatible with (if y ou made a digit al connec tion). General A2 V2 Language Audio1 Video1 Exit Move Select Compatible with Dolby Digital Setup Navigator Digital Jack Amp Connection Dolby Digital Dolby Digital/DTS Dolby Digital/MPEG Dolby D/DTS/MPEG PCM Not Connected SETUP ENTER ⢠All options (e xcep t Not Connec t ed ) assume PCM compatibilit y . The PCM option means only compatible with PCM. ⢠More information on the se audio formats is a vailable in the Glossar y on page 60 . ⢠Consult the manual that came with y our amplifier if youâÂÂr e unsur e about compatibilit y with an y of these forma ts. 4 Choose an OSD menu language. General A2 V2 Language Audio1 Video1 Exit Move Select Select the On Screen Language Setup Navigator OSD Language Language English fran çais Deutsch Italiano Espa ñol SETUP ENTER ⢠T aiw anese model: English 5 Selec t the t ype of TV y ou hav e. General A2 V2 Language Audio1 Video1 Exit Move Select Widescreen TV 16:9 aspect ratio Setup Navigator TV T ype TV Connection Widescreen(16:9) Standard(4:3) SETUP ENTER ⢠See Aspect ratio in the Glossar y on page 60 if y ouâÂÂr e unsur e of the difference bet ween widescr een and standar d TVs. 6 Selec t the t ype of analog audio connec- tions y ou made t o your amplifier/ r eceiv er . General A2 V2 Language Audio1 Video1 Exit Move Select 2channel jacks for L/R Setup Navigator Analog Jacks Amp Connection 2 Channel Dolby Digital/DTS 5.1Channel Not Connected SETUP ENTER ⢠If you connect ed the audio output dir ectly t o y our TV follo wing the Easy setup on page 1 0 , choose 2 Channel.
19 En 4 Get ting St ar t ed 9 Confirm whether y our amplifier is compatible with 96kHz audio. General A2 V2 Language Audio1 Video1 Exit Move Select Digital jack not compatible with 96kHz Setup Navigator 96kHz PCM Audio Amp Connection No Ye s Don't Know SETUP ENTER ⢠Y ou wonâÂÂt see this screen if y ou selected Not Connect ed in st ep 8. ⢠Selecting Donâ t Know has the same effect a s selecting No : an y 9 6kHz audio will be downsampled t o 4 8kHz. This is a more compatible sampling fr equency . See Sampling frequenc y in the Glossar y on page 6 1 for mor e on this. 1 0 Selec t âÂÂSa v e Changesâ t o mak e the set tings. General A2 V2 Language Audio1 Video1 Exit Move Select Changes are saved Setup Navigator Exit Setup Navigator Save Changes Delete Changes Start Again SETUP ENTER 1 1 Press SETUP t o exit. ⢠Y ou may no t need t o do this step, depending on when y ou use the Setup Na vigat or . Congr atulations, se t up is complet e! If y ou want t o use the Setup Na vigat or again at an y time, it is av ailable fr om the Gener al menu. Also, each individual se t ting can be changed using the appr opriat e menu optionâ chapt er 7 explains all men u options in de tail.
20 En Get ting St ar t ed 4 Pla ying discs The basic pla yback controls for pla ying discs ar e cov ered her e. F ur ther functions ar e det ailed in the ne xt chap ter . Not e Thr oughout this manual, the t erm âÂÂD VDâ means D VD- V ideo, D VD-Audio and D VD-R/R W . If a function is specific t o a par ticu- lar kind of D VD disc, it is specified. 1 Switch the play er on. If y ouâÂÂr e pla ying a D VD or Super VCD/V ideo CD, also turn on your TV and mak e sure tha t it is set t o the correct video input. 2 Pre ss 0 t o open the disc tr a y . 3 Load a disc. Load a disc with the label side facing up, using the disc tr ay guide t o align the disc (if y ouâÂÂr e loading a double-sided D VD disc, load it with the side y ou w ant t o play face do wn). 4 Pre ss 3 t o start playback. If y ouâÂÂre pla ying a D VD or Super VCD/Video CD, a men u ma y appear . See page 2 2 for how t o na vigat e the se. àDVD PLA YER PREVIOUS NEXT REV FWD P AUSE PLA Y OPEN / CLOSE STOP 8 73 4â 1 á 0 9 8 7 10 6 5 4 3 2 1 Not e This r emot e is for the D V - S7 3 3A. The but tons ar e the same for the D V -4 7A.
21 En 4 Get ting St ar t ed Basic pla yback contr ols But t on What it does 3 St arts pla yback. D VD and Super VCD/V ideo CD: if the displa y show s RESUME, pla yback st arts fr om the resume point. 8 P auses a disc thatâ s pla ying, or re starts a paused disc. 7 St ops pla yback. D VD and Super VCD/V ideo CD: Displa y show s RESUME. Pr ess 7 again t o cancel the r esume function. 1 1. Pr ess & hold for fast r ev erse scanning. R elease t o resume normal pla yback. 2. Pr ess once t o start r e v erse scannning. Pr ess again t o increa se the scan speed. (S A CD, CD and Super VCD/V ideo CD ha ve t wo scan speeds; D VD has thr ee.) Pr ess 3 t o re sume normal pla yback. á 1. Pr ess & hold for fast forw ard scanning. R elease t o resume normal pla yback. 2. Pr ess once t o start forw ar d scannning. Pr ess again t o increa se the scan speed. (S A CD, CD and Super VCD/V ideo CD ha ve t wo scan speeds; D VD has thr ee.) Pr ess 3 t o re sume normal pla yback. 4 Skips t o the st art of the curr ent tr ack or chapt er , then t o previous tr acks/ chapt ers. â Skips t o the next tr ack or chapt er . Number s 1. If the disc is st opped, pla yback st arts from the select ed title/group (D VD) or tr ack number (SA CD/CD/ Super VCD/V ideo CD). 2. If the disc is pla ying, pla yback jumps t o the start of the select ed chapt er or tr ack (within the current gr oup for D VD-Audio). 1 0 Selects titles/gr oups/chapt er s/tr acks 1 0 and over . (F or e xample, for 2 4, pr ess 1 0 , 1 0 , 4 .) D VD- Video, D VD-R/R W and Super VCD/ V ideo CD only: But t on What it does E 1. While a disc is pla ying, press and hold t o start slow -motion forwar d scanning. Pr ess again t o increa se the scanning speed fr om 1 / 16 , 1 / 8, 1 / 4 t o 1 / 2 normal pla y speed. Pre ss 3 to r esume normal pla yback. 2. While a disc is pla ying, press once t o pause; adv ance a single fr ame with each subsequent pr ess. Pr ess 3 t o r esume normal pla yback. F or D VD-Audio discs fea turing br ow sable picture s ( page 2 3 ), press t o vie w the next pictur e. D VD- Video and D VD-R/R W only: But ton What it doe s e 1. While a disc is pla ying, press and hold t o start slow -motion r ev erse scanning. Pr ess again t o increa se the scanning speed fr om 1 / 16 , 1 / 8, 1 / 4 t o 1 / 2 normal pla y speed. Pre ss 3 to r esume normal pla yback. 2. While a disc is pla ying, press once t o pause; r ever se a single fr ame with each subsequent pr ess. Pr ess 3 t o r esume normal pla yback. F or D VD-Audio discs fea turing br ow sable picture s ( page 2 3 ), press t o vie w the previous pictur e. Impor t ant While using the D VD playback contr ols, y ou ma y see the or mark displa y ed on-scr een. ⢠means that the oper ation is not allo w ed b y the pla yer . ⢠means that the oper ation is no t allo wed b y the disc.
22 En Get ting St ar t ed 4 Na vigating D VD disc menus Man y D VD discs contain menus. Sometime s these ar e display ed automa tically when y ou start playback; o thers only appear when y ou pr ess MENU or T OP MENU . F or D VD Audio discs, use T OP MENU . Not e Some D VD-Audio discs featur e a âÂÂbonus groupâ . T o access this gr oup you ha ve to input a pa ssw ord, which y ou can find on the discâ s packaging. See page 5 7 for more information. But ton What it doe s T OP MENU Displa ys the âÂÂt op menuâ of a D VD discâ this v aries with the disc. MENU Displa ys a D VD disc menuâÂÂthis varies with the disc and ma y be the same as the âÂÂt op menuâ . RETURN R eturns t o the pre viously displa yed menu scr een. On some D VD-Audio discs featuring br ow sable picture s, pr ess t o displa y the br ow ser screen. Jo y stick Mov es the cursor ar ound the screen. ENTER Selects the curr ent menu option. Number s Selects a number ed menu option (some discs only). 1 0 Selects a number ed menu option 1 0 and o v er . (F or ex ample, for 2 4, press 1 0 , 1 0 , 4 .) (Some discs only .) Na vigating Super VCD/V ideo CD PBC menus Some Super VCDs/V ideo CDs ha v e menus fr om which you can choose wha t you w ant t o w atch. These ar e called PBC (Pla yback contr ol) menus. Y ou can play a PBC Super VCDs/V ideo CDs without ha ving t o naviga t e the PBC menu b y starting playback using a number but ton t o select a tr ack, ra ther than the 3 but ton. But t on What it does RETURN Displa ys the PBC men u. Number s Selects a n umbered men u option. 1 0 Selects a number ed menu option 1 0 and o ver . (F or example, for 2 4, pre ss 1 0 , 1 0 , 4 .) 4 Displa ys the pr evious menu page (if ther e is one). â Displa ys the ne xt menu page (if there is one). Na vigating D VD-R W discs menus 1 Pre ss MENU. 2 Mov e the Joy stick left/right but t ons to t og gle bet ween Original and Pla y List. The Original scr een sho ws the cont ents of the disc as r ecorded. The Pla y List screen sho ws the cont ents in the or der progr ammed by the per son who r ecor ded the disc (not all D VD- R W discs contain a Pla y List ). ⢠Y ou canâ t switch bet w een Original and Pla y List while a disc is pla ying. 3 Mov e the Joy stick up/do wn but t ons t o highlight a menu it em in the list, then pr ess ENTER t o selec t it. ⢠Use the 4 and â t o see the pr e vious/ ne xt page. ⢠T o pr evie w the first fr ame of the highlighted menu it em, mov e the Jo ystick right . ⢠T o displa y this disc menu during pla yback, pr ess MENU.
23 En 5 Pla ying Discs àDVD PLA YER PLA Y 3 SEARCH MODE 0 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Intr oduc tion ⢠Man y of the functions co ver ed in this chapt er apply t o D VD discs, Super VCDs/Video CDs, S ACDs and CDs, although the e xact oper ation of some varie s slightly with the kind of disc loaded. ⢠When pla ying D VD discs, if the or icon appear s on-scr een when y ou try and use a particular function, either the pla y er or the disc doesnâÂÂt allow the use of that function. ⢠When pla ying Super VCDs/V ideo CDs, some of the functions ar e not av ailable in PBC mode. If y ou w ant t o use them, start the disc playing using a n umber but t on t o select a tr ack. Finding wha t you w ant on a disc Y ou can directl y access an y point on a disc using one of the sear ch modes. Use the se sear ch modes while a disc is pla ying, or when itâ s stopped. Pla yback jumps to the point specified. 1 Pre ss SEAR CH MODE r epeat edly t o choose bet w een: ⢠Title/Gr oup search (D VD only) ⢠Chapt er/T rack sear ch ⢠Page search (D VD-Audio discs with bro wsable pictur es only) ⢠Time sear ch (D VD-V ideo and Super VCD/Video CD onl y) ⢠Fr ame & Time sear ch (D VD- V ideo only) (The F r ame Search op tion in the V ideo1 menu must be On t o use this) ( page 4 7 ) ⢠Off 2 Ent er the title/chapt er/group/tr ack number or time (minut es & seconds). F or example, for title 4, pr ess 4. F or chapter/tr ack 1 2, pre ss 1 , 2 . F or 4 5 minute s into the disc, pr ess 4, 5, 0, 0 . 3 Pre ss 3 t o start/re star t pla yback. Not e This remo te is for the D V - S7 3 3A. The but tons ar e the same for the D V -4 7A.
24 En Pla ying Discs 5 Using the Multi Dial Y ou can use the Multi Dial to contr ol fast and slo w motion scanning and fr ame adv ance of D VD- Video, D VD-R/R W and V ideo CDs. When scanning, no audio is output, e v en when the scanning speed is 1/1 (normal pla yback speed). ⢠T o start scanning playback a t 1/1 6 speed, turn the MUL TI DIAL (clockwise for forwar d; anticlockwise for re v er se) during pla yback. ⢠T urn the MUL TI DIAL in the same direction t o incr ea se the scan speedâÂÂthe speed is indicat ed at the t op left of the screen. ⢠T urn in the opposit e direction t o slow the scan speed/re ver se direction. ⢠T o start high-speed scanning, turn the MUL TI DIAL quickly (clockwise for forwar d; anticlockwise for re v er se) during pla yback. ⢠Change the speed/direction in the same w a y as abo ve. ⢠T o r esume normal pla yback, pr ess 3 . ⢠T o start manual scanning, pre ss JOG MODE, then use the MUL TI DIAL t o adv ance frame s in either dir ection. T o switch off jog mode, pr ess JOG MODE again. The pictur e remains paused until y ou r est art playback. ⢠T o r esume normal pla yback, pr ess 3 . Not e Y ou can scan V ideo CDs in the same wa y as D VD- V ideo discs (see abo ve). Ho we v er , re v erse slow -motion scanning is no t possible, and ther e are just t w o fast scanning speeds. Not e P AL display s 2 5 frame s per second, number ed 0-2 4. NTSC displa y s 3 0 fr ames per second, number ed 0-2 9. The Fr ame Search op tion in the V ideo menu must be On t o use this. Pr ess DISPLA Y while a still pictur e is displa y ed t o see the fr ame number . Depending on the disc, it ma y not be possible t o sear ch for a specific fr ame. Also, when using fr ame advance, forwar d st ep or re ver se step. Each fr ame may not be appear in e xact order when st epping thr ough them. The number assigned t o a specific fr ame may be differ ent when st epping thr ough the fr ames in forwar d or r ev erse mode.
25 En 5 Pla ying Discs àDVD PLA YER SUBTITLE ANGLE C CLEAR Switching camer a angles Some D VD V ideo discs featur e scenes sho t fr om t wo or more angle sâÂÂcheck the disc box for de tails: it should be mark ed with a icon if it contains multi-angle scene s. ⢠T o switch the camera angle, pr ess ANGLE. If the disc wa s paused, pla yback starts again with the ne w angle. ⢠T o hide the TV angle indicat or , choose Angle Indicat or > Off fr om the V ideo 2 menu (see page 5 1 ). Switching subtitle s Man y D VD Video discs ha ve subtitle s in one or more languagesâÂÂthe disc bo x will usually tell y ou which subtitle languages ar e av ailable. Y ou can switch subtitle language an ytime during pla yback. ⢠T o display/switch the subtitle language, pr ess SUBTITLE r epeat edly . The curr ent subtitle language is sho wn on-scr een. ⢠T o switch off subtitles, pr ess SUBTITLE then CLEAR. ⢠T o set subtitle pr efer ences, see page 5 3. Not e This r emot e is for the D V - S7 3 3A. The but tons ar e the same for the D V -4 7A.
26 En Pla ying Discs 5 Switching audio language When playing a D VD Video disc recor ded with dialog in tw o or mor e languages, you can switch audio language an ytime during pla yback. ⢠T o display/switch the audio language, pr ess A UDIO r epeat edly . The current audio language is shown on-scr een. ⢠T o set audio language prefer ences, see page 5 2. Switching audio channel Depending on the disc, you ma y be able to switch channels, when playing D VD-Audio discsâÂÂsee the disc bo x for det ails. ⢠T o switch the audio channel, pr ess A UDIO repea t edly . Switching audio channel On Super VCDs/V ideo CDs, CDs and MP3s you can switch bet ween st ereo, just the left channel or just the right channel. On D VD-R W discs that hav e bo th L and R audio channel, you can switch bet ween the L, R, or a mix of both. ⢠T o switch the audio channel, pr ess A UDIO repea t edly . The curr ent pla yback channel(s) ar e indicat ed on-screen. àDVD PLA YER AUDIO Not e This r emot e is for the D V - S7 3 3A. The but ton is the same for the D V -4 7A.
27 En 5 Pla ying Discs àDVD PLA YER P AUSE STOP PROGRAM 0 9 8 7 10 6 5 4 C 3 2 1 CLEAR ENTER 8 7 PLA Y 3 Making a pr ogr am list This featur e lets y ou progr am the play or der of title s/groups/ chapt ers/tr acks on a disc. Y ou mak e a progr am list via an on- screen displa y , using the cur sor but tons to na vigat e and the number but tons t o ent er titles/chapt ers/tr acks. Not e that progr ammed playback is not av ailable for D VD-R Ws. 1 Pr e ss PR OGRAM. Exit Move Play Current: T itle T itle Program Memory â Off 7 1 Chapter (Chapter 1~18) 1 Program Chapter Program T itle PROGRAM ENTER Exit Move Play Current: T itle Program Memory â Off 2(/20) Program Chapter Program T itle PROGRAM ENTER 2 Mo ve the Jo y stick left/right t o selec t âÂÂProgr am Chapt erâ or âÂÂPr ogr am T itleâ . 3 Mo ve the Joy stick down t o the progr am list windo w . If you select ed Progr am Chapt er , move the Jo ystick up and enter a title number (all the progr ammed chapt ers will come from this title). 4 Ent er the title/chapt er numbers for your pr ogr am list. F or titles/chapt ers 1âÂÂ9, use the corre sponding number but t ons. F or 1 0 and over , use the 1 0 but ton ( 1 0 , 1 0 , 4 for 2 4, etc.) ⢠Y ou can pr ogr am a pause instead of a title/chapt er: press 8 instead of ent ering a number in the pr ogr am list. (A pause can't be the first or last st ep in the list.) ⢠A pr ogr am list can contain up to 2 4 st eps. 5 If you w ant t o sa v e the pr ogram list, mo v e the Jo ystick do wn t o âÂÂPr ogr am Memor yâ and set it t o âÂÂOnâ . Exit Move Current: T itle T itle Program Memory On 7 1 09 07 18 Chapter (Chapter 1~18) 1 Program Chapter Program T itle Off PROGRAM ENTER Select If you do this, the pr ogr am list is automaticall y recalled when y ou next load the disc. ⢠Y ou can sav e pr ogr am lists for up t o 2 4 discs. ⢠After set ting t o On, mov e the cur sor back up to the progr am list windo w . Not e This remo te is for the D V - S7 3 3A. The but tons ar e the same for the D V -4 7A.
28 En Pla ying Discs 5 6 Pr ess ENTER or 3 t o st ar t playback immedi- at ely , or PR OGRAM t o e xit if you want t o start playback lat er . During progr am pla y , y ou may occasionally see the st art of a chapt er that wa s not progr ammed when the chapt er number changes. This is not a malfunc- tion. Not e Y ou canâÂÂt progr am tr ack numbers ov er 1 00 on S A CDs. F or Super VCDs/V ideo CDs that featur e PBC, mak e sur e that the disc is st opped befor e you st ar t. 1 Pr ess PR OGR AM. Exit Move Play Current: T rack T otal T ime 1(/10) 0.00 Program T rack PROGRAM ENTER 2 Ent er the tr ack numbers for your pr ogr am list. F or tr acks 1âÂÂ9, use the corr esponding number but tons. F or 1 0 and ov er , use the 1 0 but t on ( 1 0 , 1 0 , 4 for 2 4, etc.) ⢠Y ou can progr am a pause instead of a tr ack/ chapt er: pre ss 8 instead of ent ering a number in the progr am list. (A pause can't be the first or last st ep in the list.) ⢠A pr ogr am list can contain up to 2 4 steps. 3 Pr ess ENTER or 3 t o st ar t playback immedi- at ely , or PR OGRAM t o e xit if you want t o start playback lat er . ⢠Y ou can't st art pla yback lat er with a PBC Super VCD/V ideo CD; press ENTER or 3 t o start. Pr ogr amming tips ⢠T o view the progr am list pr ess PROGR AM . ⢠T o delet e a step in the progr am list, position the cursor on the title/gr oup/ chapt er/track and pr ess CLEAR . ⢠T o inser t a step int o the progr am list, position the cur sor wher e you want the new step t o appear , then ent er the title/gr oup/ chapt er/track number . All the following st eps mov e up one. ⢠T o add the currently pla ying title/gr oup/ chapt er/track t o the progr am list, pre ss and hold PR OGRAM for about a second. If there is no current pr ogr am list, a new one is crea ted (for D VD, if the last list cr eated w as a title list then the a title progr am list is crea ted, otherwise a chapt er pr ogr am list is crea t ed). ⢠T o delet e the progr am list, stop pla yback (pr ess 7 ), then pr ess CLEAR . The progr am list is also er ased when you r emo ve the disc from the pla yer or turn the po wer off ( standb y ). ⢠T o delet e a memorized D VD progr am list, load the D VD, pre ss PR OGRAM , then change the Pr ogr am Memor y option to Off . Pre ss ENTER to confirm.
29 En 5 Pla ying Discs Using r andom pla y Use the r andom play function t o pla y titles/chapt er s/groups/ tr acks (D VD) or tr acks (CD or Super VCD/Video CD) in a r andom order . Y ou canâ t use r andom play with D VD-R W discs, S ACD or Super VCD/V ideo CD playing in PBC mode. 1 Pr ess R ANDOM r epeat edly t o selec t a r andom play mode. The mode is display ed on-screen: ⢠Random Chapt er/T rack (from within the current title) ⢠Random T itle/Group ⢠Random (r andom pla y starts immediatel y) 2 D VD only: Pre ss ENTER or 3 t o start r andom play . ⢠T o st op the disc and cancel r andom pla yback, press 7 . ⢠T o cancel r andom pla yback without stopping pla yback, pre ss CLEAR . The rest of the disc pla ys out. T ip ⢠During r andom pla y , the 4 and â but tons function a lit tle differentl y to normal: 4 re turns t o the beginning of the curr ent tr ack/chapt er/. Y ou can't go back further than this. â selects another tr ack/chapter at r andom from those remaining. ⢠Y ou can't use r andom pla y t ogether with progr am or repea t pla y . àDVD PLA YER PREVIOUS NEXT STOP RANDOM C CLEAR ENTER 7 4â Not e This r emot e is for the D V - S7 3 3A. The but tons ar e the same for the D V -4 7A.
30 En Pla ying Discs 5 àDVD PLA YER PLA Y REPEA T C CLEAR 3 A-B Using repea t play Y ou can set the pla y er to r epea t individual tr acks on CDs or Super VCDs/Video-CDs, chapt er s/tracks or titles/gr oup on D VD discs, or the whole disc. It's also possible t o loop a section of a disc. Y ou can use the repea t toge ther with the pr ogr amming mode t o repea t the tr acks/chapt ers in the progr am list (see page 2 7 for how t o mak e a progr am list). Y ou canâ t use an y r epeat mode or looped pla y with a Super VCD/V ideo CD pla ying in PBC mode. Looped playback is no t possible with SA CD. Not e ⢠Y ou canâÂÂt use repeat and r andom pla y at the same time. ⢠If you switch camer a angle during repea t play , repea t pla y is cancelled. 1 Pre ss REPEA T during pla yback t o selec t a repea t mode. Each press switches the r epeat mode: ⢠Repea t Chapt er/T rack ⢠Repea t Title/Gr oup ⢠Repea t Off ⢠Repea t T r ack ⢠Repea t All ⢠Repea t Off 2 T o re sume normal pla yback, pre ss CLEAR. T ip Y ou can use r epeat pla y with progr am play . During pr ogr am play , pre ss REPEA T . Looping a sec tion of a disc 1 Pre ss REPEA T A-B once at the star t of the sec tion you w ant t o r epeat, then again at the end. Playback immediat ely jumps back t o the star t point and pla y s the loop r ound and round. ⢠On a D VD disc, the start and end points of the loop must be in the same title/group. 2 T o re sume normal pla yback, pre ss CLEAR. ⢠Y ou can also r epeat a section of a disc just once b y pre ssing 3 t o mark the end point (inst ead of A-B). Not e This r emot e is for the D V - S7 3 3A. The but tons ar e the same for the D V -4 7A.
31 En 5 Pla ying Discs àDVD PLA YER LAST MEMORY C CLEAR STOP 7 Bookmarking a place in a disc (LAS T MEMOR Y) If y ou wa tch only part of a D VD V ideo disc with the inten- tion of picking up lat er where y ou left off, y ou can book - mark the place then r esume pla yback at a lat er dat e without having t o manually sear ch for the right place. Y ou can use this feature for up t o five discs (aft er that the oldest bookmark is dele ted t o mak e space for a ne w one). Bookmarking also works with Super VCDs/V ideo CDs, but for one disc only , and y ou must leav e the disc in the pla yerâÂÂopening the disc tr ay er ases the memory . Last Memory ma y not w ork reliabl y with some PBC Super VCDs/V ideo CDs. Y ou canâ t use bookmarking with D VD-Audio and D VD-R W discs. Depending on the disc, you ma y not be able to use bookmarking with D VD- Video or Super VCD/V ideo CD discs. ⢠At the point fr om which you w ant t o re sume playback ne xt time, pr ess LAS T MEMOR Y . Pr ess 7 if y ou w ant t o stop pla yback here. ⢠T o re sume playback, load the disc and pr ess LAS T MEMOR Y . If the disc starts aut o playback, st op it fir st. ⢠T o clear the bookmark for the disc loaded, press LAS T MEMOR Y then CLEAR while âÂÂLast Memoryâ is display ed on-scr een. D V -S7 3 3A D V -4 7A (U.S. model) LAST MEMORY LAST
32 En Pla ying Discs 5 àDVD PLA YER CONDITION MEMORY C CLEAR Memorizing disc set tings (CONDITION MEMOR Y) If you ha ve a par ticular set of prefer ences for a disc, y ou can memorize them using the Condition Memory function. Once memorized, your set tings will be recalled aut omaticall y whenev er you load that disc. The play er can st ore set tings for 1 5 discs; after this, memorizing ano ther replace s the oldest one st ored. Condition Memory does not work with D VD-Audio and D VD-R W discs. The set tings memorized ar e: ⢠Multi-Angle ( page 2 5 ) ⢠Subtitle Language ( page 2 5 ) ⢠Audio Language ( page 2 6 ) ⢠On Scr een Display ( page 40 ) ⢠Video Adjust ( page 49) ⢠P arent al Lock lev el ( page 5 5 ) ⢠T o memorize set tings for the current disc, pr ess CONDITION MEMOR Y during playback. ⢠T o recall memorized set tings, just load the disc. The display sho ws COND_MEM and âÂÂCondition Memoryâ appears on- screen. ⢠T o clear memorized set tings, load the disc and pr ess CLEAR while âÂÂCondition Memor yâ is display ed on-scr een. D V -S7 3 3A D V -4 7A (U.S. model) CONDITION MEMORY COND.
33 En 5 Pla ying Discs Using setup menu shortcuts (FUNCTION MEMOR Y) Y ou can creat e a shor tcut menu of up t o 5 setup menu it ems that y ou often acce ss. Rather than na vigat e through the whole setup menu each time y ou want t o alter a se t - ting, y ou can access the se t ting str aight fr om the shortcut. T o add a menu it em t o the shor tcut list: 1 Pr ess SETUP . 2 Selec t the menu it em you w ant t o add. 3 Pr ess FUNCTION MEMOR Y . The item is mark ed FM . (Some it ems in the Setup menu canno t be added to the shortcut menu. In this ca se, the mark or â i This it em cannot be r egist ered in the function memor yâ is display ed on-screen.) 4 R epeat st eps 2 and 3 t o add up t o five it ems t o the shor tcut menu. 5 Pr ess SETUP t o exit. T o use the shor tcut menu: 1 Pr ess FUNCTION MEMOR Y . On Screen Display Digital Out Function Memory 2 Selec t the it em you w ant using the Joy stick and pr ess ENTER. 3 The Setup menu opens on the it em y ou selec t ed. Select from the op tions in the normal wa y . 4 Pr ess SETUP t o exit. T o dele t e an it em fr om the shor tcut menu: 1 Pr ess SETUP . 2 Selec t the menu it em you w ant t o delet e from the short - cut menu. It should be mark ed FM . 3 Pr ess FUNCTION MEMOR Y t o clear the FM mark. 4 Pr ess SETUP t o exit. àDVD PLA YER ENTER FUNCTION MEMORY F .MEM SET UP Not e This remo te is for the D V - S7 3 3A. The but tons ar e the same for the D V -4 7A.
34 En Pla ying Discs 5 àDVD PLA YER DISPLA Y Displa ying disc information V arious track, chap ter and title information, a s w ell as the video tr ansmission ra t e for D VD discs, can be display ed on- screen while a disc is pla ying, or while itâ s stopped. ⢠T o sho w/switch the information display ed, pre ss DIS- PLA Y . When a disc is playing, the informa tion appear s at the t op of the screen. K eep pre ssing DISPLA Y to change the displa yed informa- tion. Example: Play T rack 2âÂÂ1 0.24 6.29 âÂÂ6.05/ DVD-Audio display Play T r . Rate : 3 9.2 DVD display sho wing the data transmission r ate When a disc is stopped, all title/gr oup/chapt er , or tr ack informa- tion for the disc loaded appear s on-scr een. Pre ss DISPLA Y again to e xit the scr een. Not e Information for Super VCD is not displa yed. DISPLA Y Exit T itle Chapter T itle Chapter 01 06 07 08 09 10 02 03 04 05 1 ~ 30 1 ~ 21 1 ~ 46 1 ~ 12 1 ~ 8 1 ~ 10 1 ~ 13 1 ~ 5 1 ~ 4 1 ~ 8 1/2 Information: DVD Title s and number of chapt ers in each title DISPLA Y T otal time 72 . 04 T rack Ti m e Tr a c k Ti m e 01 06 07 08 09 10 02 03 04 05 5 . 23 4 . 55 6 . 13 5 . 45 5 . 10 6 . 51 3 . 18 6 . 50 4 . 16 3 . 22 1/2 Information: Compact Disc Exit T otal pla ying time of disc, tr acks and tr ack times DISPLA Y Disc T itle Original Play List 1 ~ 6 1 ~ 3 Information: DVD-RW Exit disc name (if progr ammed) Disc name (if progr ammed) and number of titles in the Original recor ding and the Play List DISPLA Y Exit Group T rack Group T rack 01 06 07 08 09 02 03 04 05 1 ~ 1 1 ~ 1 1 ~ 1 1 ~ 1 1 ~ 1 1 ~ 1 1 ~ 1 1 ~ 1 1 ~ 4 1/1 Information: DVD Groups and number of tr acks in each group DISPLA Y T otal time 72 . 04 T rack Ti m e T rack Ti m e 001 006 007 008 009 010 002 003 004 005 5 . 23 4 . 55 6 . 13 5 . 45 5 . 10 6 . 51 3 . 18 6 . 50 4 . 16 3 . 22 1/2 Information: SACD 2ch Area Exit T otal p la y in g time of disc, tr acks and tr ack times Not e This r emot e is for the D V - S7 3 3A. The but ton is the same for the D V -4 7A.
35 En 6 Pla ying MP3s àDVD PLA YER PREVIOUS NEXT REV FWD P AUSE PLA Y OPEN / CLOSE STOP 8 73 4â 1 á 0 9 8 7 10 6 5 4 3 2 1 Pla ying MP3s This pla y er can play MP3 files on a CD-R OM disc. MP3 is a popular audio format on comput ers and the Int ernet because file sizes ar e small (compared t o uncompr essed CD audio), while the sound qualit y r emains surprisingly good. 1 Switch the play er on. 2 Pre ss 0 t o open the disc tr a y . 3 Load a CD-R OM containing MP3 tr acks 4 Pre ss 3 t o start playing the fir st MP3 tr ack on the disc. ⢠It ma y tak e a few seconds for the pla yer t o locat e the tr ack on the disc, depending on the comple xit y of the file structur e. During this time, âÂÂPlease w ait a momentâ is displa yed. ⢠The tr ack name is displa y ed for the first fiv e seconds of the tr ack. Aft er the selected tr ack has pla y ed out, the ne xt tr ack recor ded on the disc st arts pla ying. ⢠Press 8 while a tr ack is pla ying to pause. Pr ess again t o re st art pla yback. ⢠Press 4 / â t o skip t o the pre vious/ne xt tr ack on the disc. ⢠Press and hold 1 / á t o scan backwar d/forwar d. ⢠Press 7 t o stop pla yback. Excep t in progr am or r andom pla y , the pla yer r emember s the curr ent folder a s long as the disc remains in the pla yer . Pr ess 3 to r est art pla yback from the fir st tr ack of that folder . Not e This r emot e is for the D V - S7 3 3A. The but tons ar e the same for the D V -4 7A.
36 En Pla ying MP3s 6 Sear ching for folders and tr acks 1 Use the SEAR CH MODE t o choose bet ween: ⢠F older search ⢠T r ack sear ch ⢠Off 2 Ent er the folder/track number . F or ex ample, for folder 4, pr ess 4 . F or tr ack 1 2, pr ess 1 , 2 . 3 Pre ss ENTER or 3 t o start/r est ar t pla yback. Using r andom pla y Files can be mono or st er eo. Use the r andom pla y feature t o play tr acks on a disc in a r andom or der . Playback st ops when all the tr acks ha ve pla y ed. 1 Pre ss RANDOM t o start r andom pla y . 2 T o cancel random pla y , pr ess 7 . Random pla y is also canceled if the disc tr a y is opened, y ou pre ss PROGR AM , or you use the number but t ons to jump t o another tr ack. Using r epeat pla y Use the r epeat pla y featur e t o r epeat the current tr ack, or all the tracks on the disc. 1 During playback, pr ess REPEA T t o selec t a repea t pla y mode. Each pr ess changes the r epeat pla y mode: ⢠Repeat T rack ⢠Repeat F older ⢠Repeat Disc ⢠Repeat Off If you st op playback or open the disc tr a y , repea t play is also canceled. Displa ying MP3 information 1 Pr ess DISPLA Y repea t edly during pla y - back t o display v arious MP3 information on-scr een. Ther e ar e four information scr eens: Displa y s when pla ying Play T rack 1/7 0.07 TRACK1~1 Play Folder 2/3 0.07 FOLDER~1 ë ë ë ë Play T rack 2 âÂÂ1 0.07 â 3.13/ 3.20 Play T r . Rate: 2 âÂÂ16 0.07 128kbps current track number/ total number of tracks in folder elapsed time of current track track name current folder number/total number of folders elapsed time of current track folder name current folder number/current track number elapsed time of current track remaining time of current track total time of current track current folder number/current track number elapsed time of current track transmission rate level Display off Displa y s when st opped Exit Folder 001 002 003 004 005 Folder 006 007 008 009 010 T rack 1 ~ 10 1 ~ 13 1 ~ 5 1 ~ 4 1 ~ 8 Tr a c k 1 ~ 9 1 ~ 11 1 ~ 3 1 ~ 22 1 ~ 15 1/2 Information: MP3 F olders and number of tr acks in each folder DISPLA Y
37 En 6 Pla ying MP3s Using the MP3 Navigat or Use the MP3 Navigat or to mak e searching for the track(s) y ou want t o play ea sier . Y ou can also use it t o add or clear tracks fr om the pr ogr am list. 1 Load a CD-R OM containing MP3 tr acks. 2 Pre ss MENU t o ent er the MP3 Naviga t or scr een. ⢠The left side of the scr een show s a list of folders cont aining MP3 tr acks. ⢠If you displa y the MP3 Na vigat or when a disc is pla ying, the currentl y pla ying folder and tr ack number s are sho wn at the t op left of the scr een. MP3 Navigator Exit Play Folder Current : 3 1-1 T rack 1.TRACK1~1 2.TRACK2~2 3.TRACK3~3 4.TRACK4~4 1.FOLDER~1 2.FOLDER~2 3.FOLDER~3 4.FOLDER~4 5.FOLDER~5 6.FOLDER~6 MENU ENTER ⢠On the right side is a list of MP3 tr acks fr om the fir st folder in the list. MP3 Navigator Exit Play Folder Current : 3 1-1 Tr a c k 1.TRACK1~1 2.TRACK2~2 3.TRACK3~3 4.TRACK4~4 1.FOLDER~1 2.FOLDER~2 3.FOLDER~3 4.FOLDER~4 5.FOLDER~5 6.FOLDER~6 MENU ENTER Del PGM CLEAR 1~4 1~10 Na vigat e using the follo wing contr ols: Jo y stick left/right â Select folder and tr acks from the current scr een. Jo y stick up/down â Select the pre vious/ne xt of folders and tr acks. T o mov e r apidly up or down a long list of folders or tr acks, pr ess and hold the Jo y stick up/down. ENTER â Pla y the currentl y select ed folder or track. MP3 tr acks that are unplay able on this pla yer ar e aut omaticall y skipped and the displa y show s âÂÂUNPLA Y ABLE MP3 F ORMA Tâ . MENU â Exit the MP3 Naviga t or PR OGR AM â Add the currentl y select ed tr ack to the progr am list. (T r acks in the progr am list ar e marked .) Pre ssing PR OGRAM r epeat edly will add the tr ack to the pr ogr am list repea t edly . See Making a program list of MP3 tracks on page 3 8 for how t o use progr am pla y . (Pre ss MENU to e xit the MP3 Na vigat or first.) CLEAR â Clear the currentl y selected tr ack fr om the progr am list. T o tal n umber of T r ack T o tal n umber of F older
38 En Pla ying MP3s 6 Making a progr am list of MP3 tr acks 1 Pre ss PR OGR AM t o ent er the MP3 Progr am scr een. If you added tr acks t o the progr am list fr om the Using the MP3 navig at or on page 3 7 , the tr acks ar e displa y ed here. ENTER PROGRAM MP3 Program Exit Play Move Folder : 001~25 â â â :â â âÂÂâ â âÂÂ: â â âÂÂâ â âÂÂ: â â âÂÂâ â âÂÂ: â â â â â â :â â âÂÂâ â âÂÂ: â â âÂÂâ â âÂÂ: â â âÂÂâ â âÂÂ: â â â â â â :â â âÂÂâ â âÂÂ: â â âÂÂâ â âÂÂ: â â âÂÂâ â âÂÂ: â â â â â â :â â âÂÂâ â âÂÂ: â â âÂÂâ â âÂÂ: â â âÂÂâ â âÂÂ: â â â â â â :â â âÂÂâ â âÂÂ: â â âÂÂâ â âÂÂ: â â âÂÂâ â âÂÂ: â â â â â â â â â â â : â â â â â â â â Fr om this screen you can ent er folder and tr ack number s directl y to build up a pr ogr am list. 2 Use the number but t ons t o ent er a thr ee- digit folder number . The number of folders on the disc is displa yed in the t op-left of the scr een. Once youâÂÂve ent ered a valid folder number , the name of the folder appears. ENTER PROGRAM MP3 Program Exit Play Move T rack 001~10 001: â â âÂÂâ â âÂÂ: â â âÂÂâ â âÂÂ: â â âÂÂâ â âÂÂ: â â â â â â :â â âÂÂâ â âÂÂ: â â âÂÂâ â âÂÂ: â â âÂÂâ â âÂÂ: â â â â â â :â â âÂÂâ â âÂÂ: â â âÂÂâ â âÂÂ: â â âÂÂâ â âÂÂ: â â â â â â :â â âÂÂâ â âÂÂ: â â âÂÂâ â âÂÂ: â â âÂÂâ â âÂÂ: â â â â â â :â â âÂÂâ â âÂÂ: â â âÂÂâ â âÂÂ: â â âÂÂâ â âÂÂ: â â â FOLDER1~ : â â â â â â â â T ot al number of folder or tr ack F older name T rack name 3 Use the number but t ons t o ent er a thr ee- digit track number . The number of tr acks in the current folder is displa y ed in the t op-left of the screen. ENTER PROGRAM MP3 Program Exit Play Folder 001~25 001:008 â â âÂÂ: â â âÂÂâ â âÂÂ: â â âÂÂâ â âÂÂ: â â â â â â :â â âÂÂâ â âÂÂ: â â âÂÂâ â âÂÂ: â â âÂÂâ â âÂÂ: â â â â â â :â â âÂÂâ â âÂÂ: â â âÂÂâ â âÂÂ: â â âÂÂâ â âÂÂ: â â â â â â :â â âÂÂâ â âÂÂ: â â âÂÂâ â âÂÂ: â â âÂÂâ â âÂÂ: â â â â â â :â â âÂÂâ â âÂÂ: â â âÂÂâ â âÂÂ: â â âÂÂâ â âÂÂ: â â â â â â â â â â â : â â â â â â â â Move Na vigat e using the follo wing contr ols: Jo y stick â Na vigat e the progr am list. CLEAR â Clear the currentl y select ed item in the progr am list. ENTER â Start pla ying the progr am list. PR OGR AM â Exit the MP3 Pr ogr am screen.
39 En 7 D VD Se tup Menu Using the Setup menu The Setup men u give s you access t o all the play erâ s set tings. Pr ess SETUP to displa y/leav e the menu and the Jo y stick and ENTER but tons on the r emot e to na vigat e and select op tions. In some screens y ou can pr ess RETURN t o leav e the scr een without making an y changes. The contr ols for each menu ar e shown a t the bot t om of the scr een. If an option is gr ay ed out it means that it canno t be changed at the curr ent time. This is usually because a disc is pla ying. St op the disc, then change the se t ting. The curr ent se t ting for any op tion is mark ed with a colored bo x. The color of the box indica te s what kind of disc the set ting is applicable to: blue for D VD only; y ellow for D VD and Super VCD/V ideo CD; orange for D VD-Audio and S A CD/CD; green for an y t ype of disc. Not e The language options sho wn in the on-screen displa y illustra tions on the following page s may no t correspond t o those av ailable in y our country or r egion. Setup Menu Mode ⢠Default set ting: Exper t The Expert setup menu give s you acce ss t o all the pla yerâ s set tings. Switch t o Basic for a reduced set of mor e commonly used se t tings. The Basic menu also fea tures an informa tion bar which t ells you mor e about what the curr ently highlight ed op tion means. Sections belo w mark ed with the icon ar e a vailable only in Expert mode. â â â â General A2 V2 Language Audio1 Video1 Exit Move Setup Menu Mode Setup Navigator Parental Lock Bonus Group Auto Disc Menu Group Playback Expert Basic Off (us) On Single SETUP àDVD PLA YER SET UP STOP ENTER 7 RETURN Not e This r emot e is for the D V - S7 3 3A. The but tons ar e the same for the D V -4 7A.
40 En D VD Se tup Menu 7 OSD Set tings OSD Language ⢠Set in Setup Navigator (default: English) Choose the language y ou want the OSDs in. â â â Language A2 V2 General Audio1 Video1 Exit Move OSD Language Audio Language Subtitle Language Auto Language DVD Language Subtitle Display Subtitle Off English fran çais Deutsch Italiano Espa ñol On Selected Subtitle SETUP ⢠T aiw anese model: English On Scr een Display ⢠Default set ting: On If you pr efer not t o hav e the oper ation displa ys shown on-scr een, change the set ting t o Off . â â â Video2 A2 Language General Audio1 V1 Exit Move Background Video Adjust Still Picture On Screen Display Angle Indicator Black Auto On Off SETUP Audio set tings Audio DR C ⢠Default set ting: Off When wa tching Dolb y Digital D VDs at low volume, itâ s eas y t o lose the lo w le vel sounds complet elyâÂÂincluding some of the dialog. Switching on Audio DR C (Dynamic Range Control ) can help things b y bringing up the low lev el sounds, while keeping the lid on high le vel peaks. The Off set ting leav es the original dynamics int act; On âÂÂsquashe sâ the dynamics; but e xactly how m uch differ ence y ou can hear bet ween the set tings will depend on the mat erial youâÂÂr e wa tching. SETUP â â â â â V2 Video1 General A2 Language Exit Move Audio DRC Dolby Digital Out DTS Out Linear PCM Out MPEG Out Digital Out SACD Playback Audio1 Off On DTS 3 PCM Down Sample On MPEG 3 PCM On 2ch Area R emember ⢠Audio DR C is only effective with Dolb y Digit al audio sour ces. ⢠The effect of Audio DR C depends on your speak er s and A V amplifier set tings.
41 En 7 D VD Se tup Menu Dolb y Digital Out ⢠Default: Dolby Digit al Y ou only need to mak e this setting if you connect ed this sy stem to another component (AV amplifier , etc.) using one of the digital outputs. If your A V amplifier (or other connect ed component) is Dolb y Digit al compatible, set t o Dolby Digit al , o therwise set t o Dolby Digit al 3 PCM . â â â â â V2 Video1 General A2 Language Exit Move Audio DRC Dolby Digital Out DTS Out Linear PCM Out MPEG Out Digital Out SACD Playback Audio1 Off Dolby Digital Dolby Digital 3 PCM Down Sample On MPEG 3 PCM On 2ch Area SETUP D TS Out ⢠Default set ting: DTS 3 PCM Y ou only need to mak e this setting if you connect ed the player t o another component (AV amplifier , etc.) using one of the digital outputs. If your A V amplifier (or other connect ed component) has a built -in DTS decoder , se t this to DT S , otherwise set t o D TS 3 PCM . Check the manual that came with the o ther compo- nent if youâÂÂr e unsure whe ther it is D TS compat - ible. â â â â â â V2 Video1 General A2 Language Exit Move Audio DRC Dolby Digital Out DTS Out Linear PCM Out MPEG Out Digital Out SACD Playback Audio1 Off Dolby Digital DTS DTS 3 PCM MPEG 3 PCM On 2ch Area SETUP Impor tant If you se t to D TS with a non-D TS compatible amplifier , noise will be output when you pla y a D TS disc. Linear PCM Out ⢠Default set ting: Down Sample On Y ou only need to mak e this setting if you connect ed the player t o another component (A V amplifier , etc.) using one of the digital outputs. If your A V amplifier (or other connect ed component) is compatible with high sampling r at es (9 6 kHz), set this t o Do wn Sample Off , otherwise set it t o Down Sample On (9 6 kHz audio is conv erted t o a more compa tible 4 8 kHz). Check the manual that came with the other component if y ouâÂÂre unsur e whether it is 9 6 kHz compatible. â â â â â â V2 Video1 General A2 Language Exit Move Audio DRC Dolby Digital Out DTS Out Linear PCM Out MPEG Out Digital Out SACD Playback Audio1 Off Dolby Digital DTS 3 PCM Down Sample On Down Sample Off On 2ch Area SETUP Not e Even when se t t o Down Sample Off , some discs will only output do wn sampled audio through the digital output s. High sampling r at e D VD-Audio discs (1 9 2kHz or 1 7 6.4kHz) alwa y s output audio do wn sampled t o 9 6kHz or 8 8.2kHz thr ough the digit al outputs.
42 En D VD Se tup Menu 7 MPEG Out ⢠Default set ting: MPEG 3 PCM Y ou only need to mak e this setting if you connect ed the player t o another component (A V amplifier , etc.) using one of the digital outs. If your A V amplifier (or other connect ed component) is compatible with MPEG audio, se t this t o MPEG, otherwise se t it t o MPEG 3 PCM (MPEG audio is conv erted t o more compa tible PCM audio). Check the manual that came with the other component if y ouâÂÂre unsur e whether it is MPEG audio compatible. â â â â â V2 Video1 General A2 Language Exit Move Audio DRC Dolby Digital Out DTS Out Linear PCM Out MPEG Out Digital Out SACD Playback Audio1 Off Dolby Digital DTS 3 PCM Down Sample On MPEG MPEG 3 PCM 2ch Area SETUP Digital Out ⢠Default set ting: On If at an y time you need t o switch off the digital audio output, set this t o Off , otherwise lea ve it On . Not e that y ou canâÂÂt switch on/off the optical and coaxial outputs individuall y . â â â â â V2 Video1 General A2 Language Exit Move Audio DRC Dolby Digital Out DTS Out Linear PCM Out MPEG Out Digital Out SACD Playback Audio1 Off Dolby Digital DTS 3 PCM Down Sample On MPEG 3 PCM On Off SETUP S A CD Pla yback ⢠Default set ting: 2ch Area SA CD discs can be divided up int o sev er al different ar eas â st ereo audio, 5.1 channel audio and, for h ybrid SA CDs, st andard CD audio. The SA CD Pla yback set ting enables y ou t o select which ar ea of the disc you want t o pla y . â â â â V2 Video1 General A2 Language Exit Move Audio DRC Dolby Digital Out DTS Out Linear PCM Out MPEG Out Digital Out SACD Playback Audio1 Off Dolby Digital DTS 3 PCM Down Sample On 2ch Area Multi-ch Area CD Area SETUP Not e If you select an ar ea that isnâÂÂt on the disc loaded, a differ ent ar ea of the disc will pla y . F or e xample, if y ou choose st andar d CD audio but the disc loaded is not a h ybrid SA CD, the st er eo SA CD audio will pla y . V ir tual Surr ound ⢠Default set ting: Off If you connected y our D VD pla yer using only the st er eo analog outputs and se t Audio Out (see below) t o 2 Channel, you can simulat e surr ound sound b y set ting V irtual Surr ound t o T ruSurround . â â â â â Audio2 Video1 Language General A1 V2 Exit Move Virtual Surround Legato PRO Audio Out Speaker Setting Gain Setting Hi-Bit CD Digital Direct Off T ruSurround 2Channel Fix On Off SETUP Not e ⢠There is no effect when the audio sour ce is D VD- Audio, DTS or 9 6 kHz LPCM or during CD, MP3 or S A CD playback. ⢠The digital audio output lev el is reduced when pla ying 2 channel Dolb y Digital D VDs or V ideo CDs with T ruSurround select ed. If you pla y a multichannel Dolb y Digit al D VD with Dolby Digit al t o PCM conv er sion (see page 4 1 ) and T ruSurround select ed, there is no digital output. ⢠How good the surr ound effect is varie s with the disc. T ruSurr ound T ruSurround uses t echnology that simula t es multichannel surr ound sound using only t w o speaker s.
43 En 7 D VD Se tup Menu Audio Out ⢠Set in Setup Navigator (Default: 2 Channel) If you connected this play er to your amplifier using the 5.1 channel analog outputs (front, surround, cent er and subw oofer outs), set this t o 5.1 Channel ; if you connect ed only the st er eo outs, set to 2 Channel . â â â â â â Audio2 Video1 Language General A1 V2 Exit Move Virtual Surround Legato PRO Audio Out Speaker Setting Gain Setting Hi-Bit CD Digital Direct Off Standard 2 Channel 5.1 Channel Fix On Off SETUP Not e ⢠Even if you set Audio Out to 5.1 Channel, youâÂÂll only get sound fr om all speak er s when pla ying a multi-channel D VD-Audio disc, or Dolb y Digit al, D TS or MPEG encoded D VD disc. ⢠If you se t to 2 Channel, Dolb y Digit al, D TS and MPEG audio is mixed do wn to t wo channels so you still hear all the audio r ecorded on the disc. ⢠Some D VD-Audio discs donâÂÂt allow down-mixing of audio. These discs alwa ys output multi-channel audio regar dless of the set ting made her e. About sour ce audio output When the sour ce output mode has been switched be t ween the 5.1 Channel and 2 Channel mode set tings using the Audio Out set ting in the Setup screen Audio 2 menu, audio output for each sour ce will be as sho wn on the following t able. *1 : Discs that pr ohibit downmixing will be output as 5.1channel e ven if 2 Channel is select ed. *2 : Discs that pr ohibit downmixing also mut e the digital output. *3 : If the sound is mono, Lch and Rch audio will be the same. AUDIO CONTENTS OUTPUT MODE AUDIO OUT (2 CH) 5.1 CH 2 CH 5.1 CH 2 CH 5.1 CH/ 2 CH 5.1 CH 2 CH 5.1 CH/ 2 CH 5.1 CH/ 2 CH DV D CD SACD Super VCD/ Video CD Dolby Digital Dolby Digital Kar aoke LPCM DTS DV D -Audio Fr ont Lch, Rch 2 ch DOWNMIX Lch, Rch 2 ch DOWNMIX Lch, Rch 2 ch DOWNMIX Lch, Rch MUTE MUTE Cent er Surround LS, R S 2 ch DO WNMIX Lch, Rch Lch, Rch Lch, Rch AUDIO OUT (5.1 CH) DIGIT AL OUTPUT (S/PDIF) Lch, Rch Fr ont Lch, Rch L, R (Fr ont L,R) Cent er Surround L,R Sub W oofer Dolby Digit al or MPEG 3 PCM Dolby Digit al or MPEG Dolby Digit al Lch, Rch DTS *2 *3 *1 Cent er Surround LS, R S LFE LFE MUTE Lch, Rch MUTE MUTE Dolby Digit al Lch, Rch Lch, Rch MUTE MUTE 5.1 CH/ 2 CH D VD-RW Lch, Rch Dolby Digit al, MPEG or PCM (Lch, Rch) MUTE 2 ch DOWNMIX Lch, Rch 5.1 CH 2 CH Fr ont Lch, Rch Lch, Rch Cent er Surround LS, R S MPEG LFE MUTE 5.1 CH 2 CH Fr ont Lch, Rch Cent er Surround LS, R S LFE MUTE MPEG 5.1 CH 2 CH 2 ch DO WNMIX Lch, Rch Fr ont Lch, Rch Cent er Surround LS, R S LFE MUTE Lch, Rch Lch, Rch
44 En D VD Se tup Menu 7 Speak er Set ting ⢠Set in Setup Navigator (default: Cent er: Large | Sub: On | Surround: Large | Distance: all 3.0m ) Y ou only need to make this setting if y ou connected this player to your amplifier using the 5.1 channel analog outputs. This setting does not affect digit al audio output. F ollow the on-screen displa ys t o describe which speaker s ar e in your sy stem and their sizes and positions. Set the size of y our speaker s in the Size screen. The front left/right ( L/R) speaker s ha v e a fixed set ting of Lar ge . The center ( C ), left surround (LS ) and right surround ( RS) speaker s can each be set to Lar ge , Small or Off . Set a speaker t o Lar ge if the main speaker cone is 1 2cm or more; set t o Small if the itâ s less than 1 2cm. Not e that the LS and RS speaker s cannot be set independently . The subwoofer ( SW) can onl y be set t o On or Off . â â â â â â Audio2 Video1 Language General A1 V2 Exit Move Virtual Surround Legato PRO Audio Out Speaker Setting Gain Setting Hi-Bit CD Digital Direct Off Standard 2 Channel Start Fix On Off SETUP Select ENTER Exit Select Distance Return Audio2 Video1 Language General A1 V2 Speaker Setting L/R C LS RS SW Size â Large â Large â Large â Large â On LR C SW LS RS SETUP ENTER Not e ⢠When listening t o a D VD audio sour ce, the C , LS , and RS speaker s will aut omatically be se t t o the Large size se t ting. Ho w ev er , the sound will not be affect ed b y the change. Listening t o another sour ce will r eturn the speak ers t o their original se t tings. ⢠F or D VD-Audio only , if the C , LS , or RS speak er s is set t o Off, the audio is aut omati- cally do wnmixed t o st ereo. The gr aphic on the right of the screen repr esents your speak er setup, with the currently select ed speakerâ s name highlight ed in blue, and the speaker s set t o On highlighted in yello w . Set the dist ance from your main list ening position t o each speaker in the Distance scr een. The distance set ting for an y speak er that was set t o Off in the Size screen will be gr a yed out. F or the other speaker s, ent er the dist ance to the near est 0.1m (1 0cm). Y ou can set the dist ance for the L/R speaker s bet ween 0.3m and 9m. Not e that you must set the C and SW speak ers within 2m of the L/R set ting. The LS and RS speak ers must be set within - 6m and 2m of the L/R set ting. The gr aphic on the right of the screen repr esents your speak er setup, with the currently select ed speakerâ s name highlight ed in blue, and the speaker s set t o On highlighted in yello w . Not e ⢠If your subw oofer is placed be yond the adjustment r ange (L/R ñ2m), set t o the near est se t ting possible. Surround sound cohesion should no t be affected v ery much. ⢠This set ting does not appl y t o SA CD play - back. Exit Select Size Return Audio2 Video1 Language General A1 V2 Speaker Setting L/R C LS RS SW Distance â 0.3m â 0.3m â 0.3m â 0.3m â 0.3m LR C SW LS RS SETUP ENTER Pre ss ENTER
45 En 7 D VD Se tup Menu Legat o PR O ⢠Default set ting: Off Legat o PR O subtly change s the char act er of the sound. Ther e are four se t tings plus Off : ⢠Off ⢠Standar d â Give s the sound a more forw ar d, live feel ⢠Effec t 1 â Bright and lively ⢠Effec t 2 â Soft and rich ⢠Effec t 3 â Solid and well balanced Choose the set ting that best suit s the music youâÂÂr e list ening t o. St andar d is r ecommended for all music. â â Audio2 Video1 Language General A1 V2 Exit Move Virtual Surround Legato PRO Audio Out Speaker Setting Gain Setting Hi-Bit CD Digital Direct Off Off Standard Effect1 Effect2 Effect3 Off SETUP Not e ⢠The Legato PR O digital filt er affects mainly fr equencies out side of the audible r ange. ⢠Depending on the listening conditions, y ou ma y find the effect of Legat o PR O difficult to hear . ⢠The Legato PR O effect is only applied t o the fr ont left/right channels. ⢠Legato PR O does not w ork with 1 9 2kHz D VD-Audio discs or SA CD. Hi-bit ⢠Default set ting: On When set t o On, this featur e ext ends the dynamic r ange of the main front speak er s b y effectivel y increasing the bit dep th from 1 6-2 0 bit t o 2 4 bit. This allow s the pla y er t o re veal grea ter de t ail in lo w lev el audio. â â â â â SETUP Audio2 Video1 Language General A1 V2 Exit Move Virtual Surround Legato PRO Audio Out Speaker Setting Gain Setting Hi âÂÂBit CD Digital Direct Off Off 2 Channel Fix On Off
46 En D VD Se tup Menu 7 Gain Set tings ⢠Default set ting: Fix Y ou may want to make this setting if you connected this player to your amplifier using the 5.1 channel analog outputs. Under the default set ting, all channels ar e output at the relativ e volume s they wer e r ecorded at. Change the set ting t o V ariable if you want t o adjust the rela tiv e volume lev els of an y of the speaker s. Adjustment is in the r ange of -6dB t o 6dB, in steps of 0.5dB. ⢠When set t o V ariable , the ov er all output lev el ma y sound quiet er than when set t o Fix . This is not a malfunction. Not e Gain set tings are not effective when pla ying a CD with CD Digital Direct set to On . â â â â â Audio2 Video1 Language General A1 V2 Exit Move SETUP Select ENTER Virtual Surround Legato PRO Audio Out Speaker Setting Gain Setting Hi âÂÂBit CD Digital Direct Off Off 2 Channel Fix V ariable Off Exit Select T est T one Return Audio2 Video1 Language General A1 V2 L C R RS LS SW Gain Setting â 0.0 dB â 0.0 dB â 0.0 dB â 0.0 dB â 0.0 dB â 0.0 dB L R SW LS RS SETUP ENTER T o help you gauge the corr ect gain le v els, set the T est T one t o On (te st tone fr om just that speak er) or Aut o (te st t one from each speak er in turn, ex cluding the subwoofer) then adjust the gain so that all speak ers appear t o be the same v olume from your list ening position. F ollow the on-screen displa ys t o select speaker s and set the channel levels. ⢠Y ou can adjust the T est T one set ting only when the pla y er is stopped. ⢠Many A V amplifier s allow you t o make similar set tings at the amplifier stage. In this case, se t the channel lev els at the pla yer or the amplifier , not both. ⢠As the t est t one pla ys through a speaker , its name is highlight ed in yello w on-scr een. Exit Select Gain Return Audio2 Video1 Language General A1 V2 L C R RS LS SW T est T one â Off â Off â Off â Off â Off â Off L R SW LS RS SETUP ENTER Remember Y ou can't use the te st t one function when the Audio Out set ting is 2 Channel (see page 4 3 ).The t est t one will not w ork with the disc tr a y open, or while a disc is playing. CD Digital Dir ec t ⢠Default set ting: Off Set ting this to On incr ease s CD audio qualit y by b ypassing cert ain audio circuit s in the pla yer that audio signal w ould o therwise pass thr ough. How ev er , this must be set t o Off for proper pla yback of DTS encoded CDs. â â â â â Audio2 Video1 Language General A1 V2 Exit Move Virtual Surround Legato PRO Audio Out Speaker Setting Gain Setting Hi âÂÂBit CD Digital Direct Off Off 2 Channel Fix On Off SETUP Remember If this set ting is se t t o On when a D TS CD is pla yback, noise is produced. Pre ss ENTER
47 En 7 D VD Se tup Menu V ideo set tings TV Scr een ⢠Set in Setup Navigator (Default: 1 6:9 (W ide) ) If you hav e a wide scr een TV , select the 1 6:9 (W ide) set tingâÂÂwidescr een D VD soft w ar e is then shown using the full scr een area. When pla ying softw are r ecorded in con v entional (4:3) format, the se t tings on your TV will de t ermine how the ma terial is pr esent edâÂÂsee the manual that came with y our TV for details on wha t options ar e av ailable. If your TV doe s not ha ve set tings for ho w 4:3 sour ces look, choose the 1 6:9(Compre ssed) set ting. The pictur e you see on y our TV will be det ermined by the disc. See page 6 8 for mor e information. If you ha v e a conv entional TV , choose either 4:3 (Let t er Box) or 4:3 (P an & Scan) . In Let t er Box mode, widescr een softw are is sho wn with black bars a t the top and bo t t om of the scr een. P an & Scan chops the sides off widescr een mat erial to make it fit the 4:3 scr een (so e ven though the pictur e looks lar ger on the screen, y ouâÂÂr e actually seeing less of the mo vie). â â Audio1 Video1 Language General A2 V2 Exit Move TV Screen Video Out S-Viveo Out Frame Search Screen Saver 4:3(Letter Box) 4:3(Pan&Scan) 16:9(Wide) 16:9(Compressed) Off SETUP Not e ⢠Y ou cannot change this set ting when a disc is pla ying. ⢠Some discs will not allow y ou to change the aspect r atio. S- V ideo Out ⢠Default set ting: S2 Y ou only need to mak e this setting if you connect ed this player t o your TV using an S- Video cord. If you find tha t the picture is str etched or dist or t ed on the default S2 se t ting, try chang - ing it t o S1 . â â â â Audio1 Video1 Language General A2 V2 Exit Move TV Screen Video Out S-Video Out Frame Search Screen Saver 16:9(Wide ) Video S1 S2 Off SETUP F r ame Sear ch ⢠Default set ting: Off Set this t o On if you w ant t o be able t o do fr ame-accur at e sear ching of D VD discs (see page 2 3 for how t o do a time & fr ame search). On the default set ting, the time & fr ame sear ch is not a vailable. â â â â Audio1 Video1 Language General A2 V2 Exit Move TV Screen Video Out S-Video Out Frame Search Screen Saver 16:9(Wide ) Video S2 On Off SETUP Scr een Sav er ⢠Default set ting: Off If a const ant image is displa yed on a con v en- tional CR T -t ype TV , it can âÂÂburn inâ lea ving a ghost image on the scr een. Switch t o On to make sur e that a const ant image is no t dis- pla yed for a danger ously long time. If the Screen Sa ver come s on when the Speak er Setup t est t one is playing, the t est t one will st op ( page 46). â â â â Audio1 Video1 Language General A2 V2 Exit Move TV Screen Video Out S-Video Out Frame Search Screen Saver 16:9(Wide ) Video S2 Off On Off SETUP
48 En D VD Se tup Menu 7 Backgr ound ⢠Default set ting: Black This specifies wha t the screen sho ws when the pla yer is st opped. â â â â â Video2 A2 Language General Audio1 V1 Exit Move Background Video Adjust Still Picture On Screen Display Angle Indicator Pioneer Logo Black Auto On On SETUP Component V ideo Compar ed t o a standar d int erlaced TV picture, a pr ogr essiv e scan TV is capable of st able, flick er - free image s. Set onl y if you connect ed the COMPONENT VIDEO OUT or D1/D2 D- Video jacks t o a pr ogr essiv e scan-compa tible TV or monit or . Mak e changes t o the Component V ideo set ting in the Setup scr een V ideo 1 menu. â â â Audio1 Video1 Language General A2 V2 Exit Move TV Screen Component Video S-Video Out Frame Search Screen Saver 16:9(Wide ) Progressive Interlace Off Off SETUP ⢠Progr essiv e â Use this set ting with TVs and monit ors that ha ve pr ogr essiv e scan compo- nent video inputs. Check the TVâ s instruction manual if y ou are not sur e about this. ⢠Interlace â (default se t ting) use this set ting with r egular TVs that ar e not compatible with pr ogr essiv e scan. Check the TVâ s instruction manual if y ou are not sur e about this. T ip If this pla yer is set t o output pr ogr essiv e-scan video, itâ s possible that the pictur e will appear stre tched when playing discs r ecorded in 4:3 format. This happens when the TVâ s aspect r atio is set âÂÂF ullâ . T o see the picture in it s corr ect aspect r atio, change the TV set ting t o âÂÂNormalâ . If your TV doe snâ t ha v e set tings t o change the aspect r atio of the pictur e, set this pla yer t o 1 6:9(Compre ssed) . Not e If you connect a TV that is not compatible with a pr ogr essiv e scan signal and choose one of the progr essiv e scan set tings, y ou will not be able t o see an y picture a t all. W ith your TV connect ed using either the composite or S- V ideo t erminals, choose the Int erlace set ting in the Component V ideo menu. Compatibilit y of this unit with pr ogr essiv e- scan TVs. âÂÂCONSUMERS SHOULD NO TE THA T NO T ALL HIGH DEFINITION TELEVISION SETS ARE FULL Y COMP A TIBLE WITH THIS PR ODUCT AND MA Y CAUSE AR TIF A CTS T O BE DIS- PLA YED IN THE PICTURE. IN CASE OF 5 2 5 PR OGRESSIVE SCAN PICTURE PR OBLEMS, IT IS RECOMMENDED THA T THE USER SWITCH THE CONNECTION T O THE âÂÂST AND ARD DEFINITIONâ OUTPUT . IF THERE ARE QUES- TIONS REGRADING OUR TV SET COMP A TIBIL - ITY WITH THIS MODEL 5 2 5p D VD PLA YER, PLEASE CONT ACT OUR CUS T OMER SER VICE CENTER. âÂÂ4 8 0P (5 2 5P) D VD PLA YER is compatible with the following Pioneer displa ys and monit ors.â PLASMA DISPLA Y (U.S. model) ⢠PDP -5 0 3 0HD ⢠PR O-1 000HD ⢠PDP -4 3 3 0HD PR OJECTION MONIT OR RECEIVER ⢠PR O-7 2 0HD ⢠PR O-6 2 0HD ⢠PR O-5 2 0HD ⢠SD-6 4 3HDS ⢠SD-5 3 3HDS
49 En 7 D VD Se tup Menu V ideo Adjust There ar e sev er al pr e set pictur e qualit y set tings that suit different kinds of displa y device (TV , Plasma displa y , etc.). Alt ernativ ely , set up your own and sa ve them in the pla yerâ s memory . â â â â â Video2 A2 Language General Audio1 V1 Exit Move Background Video Adjust Still Picture On Screen Display Angle Indicator Black Start Auto On On SETUP Selec ting a pre set 1 Selec t âÂÂStartâ . Y ou can also access these set tings b y pr essing V . ADJ . 2 Selec t âÂÂV ideo Memor y Selec tâ . Video Memory Select Video Setup 3 Selec t a pr eset. Memory 1 Memory 2 Memory 3 PDP Professional TV(CRT) ⢠TV (CR T) â optimized set tings for a standar d t ele vision set. ⢠PDP â optimized for a plasma displa y . ⢠Professional â (default set ting) optimized for a pr ofessional monit or . ⢠Memor y 1, 2, 3 â User pre set s (see page 51 for mor e on these) Y ou can highlight a pre set while a disc is pla ying (befor e you pr ess ENTER t o select it) to see the effect on the pictur e immediat ely . Not e Depending on the disc and y our TV/monit or , the effect of these set tings ma y not be clear .
50 En D VD Se tup Menu 7 ⢠Sharpness High â Adjusts the sharpne ss of the high-fr equency (finely de t ailed) elements in the pictur e. ⢠Sharpness Mid â Adjusts the sharpne ss of the mid-fr equency (less de tailed) elements in the pictur e. ⢠Detail â Adjust s ho w sharp edges appear in the pictur e. ⢠Whit e Le vel â A djusts the int ensit y of white in the pictur e. ⢠Black Lev el â Adjust s the int ensit y of black in the pictur e. ⢠Black Setup â F or correction of floating black colour . ⢠Gamma â Adjusts the brightness of the darker image s in the picture. ⢠Hue â Adjusts the ov er all colour balance bet ween r ed and green. ⢠Chroma Le vel â Adjust s ho w satur at ed colour s appear . ⢠Chroma Dela y â Compensat es for misalign- ment of the Y (brightness) and the C (colour) components. 4 Pr ess ENTER t o sav e your changes. Cr eating y our o wn se t ting (1) 1 Selec t âÂÂStartâ . Y ou can also access these set tings b y pre ssing V. ADJ . 2 Selec t âÂÂV ideo Setupâ Video Memory Select Video Setup 3 Move the Jo ystick up/do wn t o selec t a pic tur e qualit y parame t er , then mov e the Jo y stick left/right t o adjust that par amet er . Prog. Motion Move Select Check DISPLA Y ENTER fast slow ⢠Prog. Motion â When using pr ogr essive scan, this adjusts the motion and still pictur e qualit y . ⢠PureCinema â When w a tching D VD movies, Pur eCinema optimize s the pictur e qualit y . The default set ting is Auto1, but if the pictur e appear s unnatur al, then set t o Aut o2 , On or Off as de sir ed and adjust the Pr og. Motion set ting (see abo ve). See P ureCinema in the Glossar y st arting on page 6 1 . ⢠YNR â Adjust s the amount of noise reduction (NR) applied t o the Y (brightness) compo- nent. ⢠CNR â Adjusts the amount of noise r educ- tion (NR) applied t o the C (colour) compo- nent. ⢠MNR (Mosquito Noise R eduction) â Adjusts the amount of noise r eduction applied t o the mosquit o noise (video artifacts on the edge of the image r esulting fr om MPEG compre s- sion). ⢠BNR (Block Noise R eduction) â Adjusts the amount of noise r eduction applied t o the block noise.
51 En 7 D VD Se tup Menu Cr eating y our own set ting (2) 1 Selec t âÂÂStar tâ . Y ou can also access these set tings b y pre ssing V. ADJ . 2 Selec t âÂÂV ideo Setupâ 3 Pre ss DISPLA Y . Prog. Motion PureCinema YNR CNR MNR BNR Sharpness High Sharpness Mid Memory On Auto1 Auto2 Off off max off off max max off max fast slow soft fine soft fine Off 1 2 3 Page 1/2 Detail White Level Black Level Black Setup Gamma Hue Chroma Level Chroma Delay Memory min max off Page 2/2 slow green red min max â Off 0 IRE 7.5 IRE 12 3 min max â 4 Mov e the Joy stick up or do wn t o selec t a pic tur e quality par amet er , then mo v e the Jo y stick left or right t o adjust that par amet er . 5 T o sav e your change s in one of the user pr ese ts, highlight Memory 1, 2 or 3 and pr ess ENTER. Still Pic ture ⢠Default set ting: Aut o The play er uses one of t w o processe s when displa ying a still fr ame from a D VD disc. The default Aut o set ting aut omaticall y chooses the best set ting each time. ⢠Field â produce s a stable, gener ally shake-fr ee image. ⢠Fr ame â produces a sharper image, but mor e pr one to shake than field stills. â â Video2 A2 Language General Audio1 V1 Exit Move Background Video Adjust Still Picture On Screen Display Angle Indicator Pioneer Logo Field Frame Auto SETUP Angle Indicat or ⢠Default set ting: On If you prefer not t o see the camer a icon on-scr een during multi-angle scenes on D VD discs, change this set ting t o Off . â â â â Video2 A2 Language General Audio1 V1 Exit Move Background Video Adjust Still Picture On Screen Display Angle Indicator Pioneer Logo Auto On On Off SETUP
52 En D VD Se tup Menu 7 Language set tings Audio Language ⢠Default Set ting: English This set ting is your pr eferr ed audio language for D VD discs. If the language you specify her e is recor ded on a disc, the sy st em automa tically pla ys the disc in tha t language (although this depends on the Aut o Language set tingâÂÂsee page 5 4 ). Language A2 V2 General Audio1 Video1 Exit Move OSD Language Audio Language Subtitle Language Auto Language DVD Language Subtitle Display Subtitle Off English English French German Italian Spanish Other SETUP â â¢ T aiw anese model: English Chinese Other The D VD format r ecognizes 1 3 6 different languages. Choose Other if y ou want t o specify a language other than those list ed, then follow the on-scr een displa y to select a language. Y ou ma y also w ant t o refer t o the Language code list on page 66. List of Languages Code (0~2) en: English Language A2 V2 General Audio1 Video1 Exit Return Move Select / â Audio Language 05 1 4 SETUP ENTER T ip Y ou can switch bet ween the language s r ecorded on a D VD disc an y time during playback using the A UDIO but t on. (This does not affect this set ting.) Not e ⢠Y ou cannot switch language s if there is only one language r ecor ded on the disc. In this case, the mark is displa yed. ⢠F or some discs, selection can be made using the D VD menu. In the se cases, pr ess MENU t o displa y the D VD menu scr een and then mak e y our selection.
53 En 7 D VD Se tup Menu Subtitle Language ⢠Default Set ting: English This set ting is your pr eferred sub title language for D VD discs. If the language you specify her e is r ecor ded on a disc, the s y st em automa tically pla ys the disc with those sub titles (although this depends on the Aut o Language set tingâ see page 5 4 ). Language A2 V2 General Audio1 Video1 SETUP Exit Move OSD Language Audio Language Subtitle Language Auto Language DVD Language Subtitle Display Subtitle Off English English French German Italian Spanish Other â â¢ T aiw anese model: English Chinese Other The D VD format r ecognizes 1 3 6 different languages. Choose Other if y ou want t o specify a language other than those list ed, then follow the on-scr een displa y to select a language. Y ou ma y also w ant t o refer t o the Language code list on page 66. List of Languages Code (0~2) en: English Language A2 V2 General Audio1 Video1 Exit Return Move Select / â Subtitle Language 05 1 4 SETUP ENTER T ip Y ou can change or switch off the subtitles on a D VD disc an y time during pla yback using the SUBTITLE but t on. (This does no t affect this set ting.) Not e ⢠The subtitle language cannot be switched if the subtitle language is no t r ecor ded, or if only one language is r ecorded. In this ca se, the mark will be display ed. ⢠T o clear subtitles during pla yback, press SUBTITLE and then pr ess CLEAR, or pr ess SUBTITLE until Off appear s. ⢠F or some discs, subtitle language selection can be made using the menu on the D VD. In this case, pr ess MENU t o displa y the D VD menu scr een and then make y our selection.
54 En D VD Se tup Menu 7 Aut o Language ⢠Default Set ting: On When set t o On, the pla y er alwa ys select s the default audio language on a D VD disc (French dialog for a Fr ench movie, for e xample), and displa y s subtitles in y our pr eferr ed subtitle language only if tha t is set t o something different. In o ther wor ds, mo vies in your na tive language wonâÂÂt ha ve an y subtitles, while for eign language movie s will be shown with subtitles. Set t o Off t o ha ve the s y st em pla y discs strictl y accor ding t o your Audio Language and Subtitle Language set tings. F or Auto Language t o w ork, the Audio Lan- guage and Subtitle Language se t tings must be the sameâÂÂsee pages 5 2, 5 3 . â â â â â â Language A2 V2 General Audio1 Video1 Exit Move OSD Language Audio Language Subtitle Language Auto Language DVD Language Subtitle Display Subtitle Off English English English On Off On Selected Subtitle SETUP T ip Y ou can still switch audio and subtitle language s on pla yback using the A UDIO and SUBTITLE but tons. D VD Language ⢠Default Set ting: w/Subtitle Language Some multilingual discs ha ve disc menus in sev er al languages. This set ting specifies in which language the disc menus should appear . Lea ve on the default set ting for menus t o appear in the same language as y our Sub title Lan- guage âÂÂsee page 5 3 . Language A2 V2 General Audio1 Video1 Exit Move OSD Language Audio Language Subtitle Language Auto Language DVD Language Subtitle Display Subtitle Off w/ Subtitle Language English French German Italian Spanish Other SETUP ⢠T aiw anese model: English Chinese Other The D VD format r ecognizes 1 3 6 different languages. Choose Other if y ou want t o specify a language other than those list ed, then follow the on-scr een displa y to select a language. Y ou ma y also want t o refer t o the Language code list on page 66 . List of Languages Code (0~2) en: English Language A2 V2 General Audio1 Video1 Exit Return Move Select / â DVD Language 05 1 4 SETUP ENTER Not e Y ou can also select the D VD language fr om the D VD disc menu. Pr ess MENU t o open the D VD menu and mak e y our selection accor dingly .
55 En 7 D VD Se tup Menu Gener al set tings Setup Na vigat or Use the Setup Na vigat or to mak e the basic set tings for y our D VD pla yer . See page 1 7 for det ailed instructions. â â â â General A2 V2 Language Audio1 Video1 Exit Move Setup Menu Mode Setup Navigator Parental Lock Bonus Group Auto Disc Menu Group Playback Expert Start Off (us) On Single SETUP P ar ental Lock ⢠Default lev el: Off ⢠Default passwor d: none ⢠Default country code: us (2 1 1 9) Some D VD V ideo discs feature a P ar ent al Lock lev el. If your pla yer is se t t o a low er lev el than the disc, it will requir e y ou t o ent er a passwor d befor e the disc will pla y . This gives y ou some contr ol about what y our children w atch on your D VD pla yer . Some discs also support the Country Code featur e. The pla yer does no t play cert ain scenes on these discs, depending on the country code you se t. Before y ou can set the P ar ental Lock le vel or the Country Code y ou must r egist er a passwor d. As the passw ord o wner , you can change the P ar ental Lock le vel or Country Code whene v er you lik e. Y ou can also change the passw or d. â â â General A2 V2 Language Audio1 Video1 Exit Move Setup Menu Mode Setup Navigator Parental Lock Bonus Group Auto Disc Menu Group Playback Expert Password Level Country Code Single SETUP Not e Not all discs that y ou ma y consider inappr opri- at e for your childr en use the P arent al Lock featur e. These discs will alw ay s pla y without requiring the pa sswor d fir st. Subtitle Displa y ⢠Default Set ting: On When set t o On , the play er displa ys sub titles accor ding t o the Subtitle Language and Aut o Language set tings. Set to Off t o switch subtitles off alt ogether (although see Sub title Off on this page for special cases). Se t t o Assist Subtitle t o hav e the pla yer displa y the extr a assistiv e subtitles recor ded on t o some D VD discs. â â â â Language A2 V2 General Audio1 Video1 Exit Move OSD Language Audio Language Subtitle Language Auto Language DVD Language Subtitle Display Subtitle Off English English English On On Off Assist Subtitle SETUP Not e ⢠If there is no subtitle informa tion recor ded on the disc, no subtitles ar e displa yed e ven if this function is set t o On. ⢠Whether this set ting is On or Off , y ou can still switch subtitle s (or switch them off) using the SUBTITLE but t on. Subtitle Off ⢠Default Set ting: Selec t ed Subtitle Some discs displa y subtitle s ev en if the Subtitle Displa y set ting (abov e) is set t o Off . In this case, y ou can either ha ve the sub titles displa yed in the same language as y our preferr ed audio language ( W ith Audio ), or in y our pr eferr ed subtitle language ( Select ed Subtitle ). If the Audio Language and Subtitle Language set tings ar e the same then both of these choices will give the same r esult. â â â â â Language A2 V2 General Audio1 Video1 Exit Move OSD Language Audio Language Subtitle Language Auto Language DVD Language Subtitle Display Subtitle Off English English English On English With Audio Selected Subtitle SETUP
56 En D VD Se tup Menu 7 R egist ering a ne w passwor d Y ou must regist er a passwor d before y ou can change the P arent al Lock level or ent er a Country Code. 1 Selec t âÂÂP assw ordâ . General A2 V2 Language Audio1 Video1 Exit / â Move Return Parental Lock: Register Code Number SETUP 2 Use the number but t ons t o enter a 4-digit passw or d. Itâ s also possible t o use the Joy stick t o set the passw or d (up and down t o set the number; left and right to change the cur sor position). 3 Pre ss ENTER t o regist er the passwor d. If you for get y our passwor d, y ou can re set the sy st em then r egister a ne w one. See page 6 5 for how t o re set the pla yer . Changing y our passwor d T o change y our passw ord, confirm your e xisting passw or d then enter a ne w one. 1 Selec t âÂÂPa sswor d Changeâ . 2 Use the number but t ons t o ent er y our existing passw ord. ⢠The number s appear as ast erisks as you ent er them. ⢠Itâ s also possible t o use the Jo y stick t o set the passw ord (up and down t o set the number; left and right t o change the cur sor position). 3 Pre ss ENTER. 4 Enter a new passw or d. 5 Pre ss ENTER. Set ting/changing the P ar ental Lock le vel 1 Selec t âÂÂLev elâ . 2 Use number but t ons t o ent er your passw or d, then pr ess ENTER. 3 Selec t a new le v el. Mov e left war d t o lock mor e lev els (mor e discs will requir e the passw ord); right war d t o unlock lev els. Y ou canâÂÂt lock lev el 1. General A2 V2 Language Audio1 Video1 Exit Return Move Select Parental Lock: Level Change SETUP ENTER 1 Level 234 678 5 Off 4 Pre ss ENTER t o se t the new lev el. T ip Use the Condition Memory feature ( page 3 2 ) t o sa ve the P ar ental Lock lev el for individual discs. Set ting/changing the Country Code Y ou may also want t o refer t o the Country code list on page 66 . 1 Selec t âÂÂCountr y Codeâ . 2 Use number but tons t o ent er your passwor d, then press ENTER. 3 Selec t a countr y code. Y ou can select the country code by let ter or number . See page 66 for the list of country codes. List of Codes Code (0~2) us Language A2 V2 General Audio1 Video1 Exit Return Move Select / â Country Code 21 1 9 SETUP ENTER 4 Pre ss ENTER t o se t the ne w Countr y Code.
57 En 7 D VD Se tup Menu Aut o Disc Menu ⢠Default set ting: On This specifies whether the menu (T op menu) is aut omaticall y displa yed aft er loading a disc. Set t o On if you want the menu displa yed aut omatically , or Off if you donâ t want it display ed. â â â General A2 V2 Language Audio1 Video1 Exit Move Setup Menu Mode Setup Navigator Parental Lock Bonus Group Auto Disc Menu Group Playback Expert Off (us) On Off SETUP Not e Some D VD discs displa y a menu automa tically regar dless of this set ting. If you pre ss 3 while a disc is loading, this set ting is ignored. Bonus Gr oup Some D VD-Audio discs ha v e an extr a âÂÂbonusâ group tha t requir es a 4-digit ke y number t o access. See the disc packaging for de tails and the ke y number . When y ou try and pla y the bonus gr oup, the k e y number input scr een will aut omaticall y appear , although it is also a vailable fr om the Gener al menu. Input the number and pr ess ENTER . General A2 V2 Language Audio1 Video1 Exit / â Move Return Bonus Group: Key Number Input ENTER â â â â General A2 V2 Language Audio1 Video1 Exit Move Setup Menu Mode Setup Navigator Parental Lock Bonus Group Auto Disc Menu Group Playback Expert Off (us) Start On Single SETUP Not e If you eject the disc, switch the po wer off , or unplug the pla y er , you will need t o r e-enter the ke y number . Gr oup Playback ⢠Default set ting: Single D VD-Audio discs can ha v e up to 9 gr oups of tr acks. When set t o Single, the select ed group pla ys and then the disc st ops, or re turns t o the menu scr een. Use Gr oup Sear ch ( page 2 3 ) t o select the gr oup t o play . (Y ou cannot use the tr ack skip 4 / â or scan but tons 1 / á in this mode.) Set t o All if you w ant to pla y all the gr oups on a disc consecutivel y . Not e Even if the pla yer s is set t o All but you select a group t o pla y from the disc men u, only tha t group will pla y . If you st op pla yback, all gr oups will pla y again when y ou rest art pla yback. â â â General A2 V2 Language Audio1 Video1 Exit Move Setup Menu Mode Setup Navigator Parental Lock Bonus Group Auto Disc Menu Group Playback Expert Off (us) On All Single SETUP Pre ss ENTER t wice
58 En Additional Informa tion 8 Handling discs When holding discs of an y t ype, tak e care not to lea ve fingerprints, dirt or scr atches on the disc surface. Hold the disc by its edge or b y the cent er hole and edge. Damaged or dirt y discs can affect playback perfor - mance. T ak e car e also not to scr atch the label side of the disc. Although not as fr agile as the r ecorded side, scr atches can still r esult in a disc becoming unusable. Should a disc become marked with fingerprints, dust, etc., clean using a soft, dry cloth, wiping the disc lightly fr om the cent er t o the outside edge as shown in the diagr am belo w . W ipe lightly fr om the cent er of the disc using str aight strok es. DonâÂÂt wipe the disc sur face using cir cular strok es. If necessary , use a cloth soaked in alcohol, or a commerciall y a v ailable CD/D VD cleaning kit to clean a disc more thoroughl y . Nev er use benzine, thinner or other cleaning agents, including products designed for cleaning vin yl r ecor ds. St oring discs Although CDs and D VD discs ar e more dur able than vin yl recor ds, y ou should still t ak e care to handle and stor e discs corr ectly . When you'r e not using a disc, return it to its case and st ore upright. Av oid lea ving discs in ex cessiv ely cold, humid, or hot envir onments (including under direct sunlight). Don't glue paper or put sticker s onto the disc, or use a pencil, ball-point pen or other sharp-tipped writing instrument. These could all damage the disc. F or mor e det ailed care information see the instruc- tions that come with discs. Do not load mor e than one disc int o the pla yer . Discs t o av oid Discs spin at high speed inside the pla yer . If you can see that a disc is cr ack ed, chipped, warped, or otherwise damaged, don't risk using it in y our pla yerâÂÂy ou could end up damaging the unit. This unit is designed for use with con ventional, fully cir cular discs only . Use of shaped discs is not r ecommended for this product. Pioneer disclaims all liabilit y arising in connection with the use of shaped discs. Cleaning the pickup lens The D VD pla y erâ s lens should not become dirt y in normal use, but if for some r eason it should malfunction due t o dust or dirt, consult your near est Pioneer -authorized service center . Although lens cleaner s for CD pla yer s are commer cially a vailable, w e do not recommend using them since some ma y damage the lens. Pr oblems with condensation Condensation ma y form inside the pla yer if it is brought int o a warm r oom from out side, or if the t emper atur e of the room rise s quickly . Although the condensation w onâ t damage the pla yer , it ma y tempor arily impair its perfor - mance. F or this reason y ou should lea ve it t o adjust t o the w armer t emper atur e for about an hour before switching on and using.
59 En 8 Additional Informa tion Hints on inst allation W e want you t o enjo y using this unit for year s t o come, so please bear in mind the following points when choosing a suit able location for it: Do... â Use in a well-v entilat ed room. â Place on a solid, flat, lev el surface, such as a t able, shelf or st ereo r ack. Donâ t... â Use in a place exposed t o high t emper atur es or humidit y , including near r adiator s and other heat - gener ating appliances. â Place on a windo w sill or other place wher e the pla yer will be exposed t o direct sunlight. â Use in an ex cessivel y dust y or damp envir onment. â Place dir ectly on top of an amplifier , or other component in your st er eo sy st em that becomes hot in use. â Use near a t elevision or monit or as y ou may e xperience int erferenceâÂÂe speciall y if the t elevision uses an indoor antenna. â Use in a kitchen or other r oom where the pla yer ma y be exposed t o smoke or st eam. â Use on a thick rug or carpet, or cov er with clothâÂÂthis ma y pre vent proper cooling of the unit. â Place on an unst able surface, or one that is not lar ge enough to support all four of the unitâ s feet. Mo ving the pla y er If you need t o mo v e the pla y er , first press ST ANDB Y/ON on the fr ont panel t o turn the pla y er off. W ait for --OFF-- t o disappear fr om the displa y , then unplug the pow er cord. Nev er lift or mov e the unit during pla ybackâÂÂdiscs r ot at e at a high speed and may be damaged. P o w er cor d caution Handle the pow er cor d by the plug part. Do not pull out the plug by tug ging the cor d, and ne v er touch the pow er cord when your hands ar e we t, as this could cause a shor t cir cuit or electric shock. Do not place the unit, a piece of furniture, or other object on the pow er cor d or pinch the cord in an y other wa y . Nev er make a knot in the cord or tie it with other cords. The pow er cords should be r out ed so that the y are no t likely t o be stepped on. A damaged pow er cord can cause a fire or give you an electric shock. Check the pow er cord once in a while. If you find it damaged, ask y our neare st Pioneer authorized service cent er or your dealer for a replacement.
60 En Additional Informa tion 8 DT S R D TS st ands for Digit al Theater S yst em. D TS is a surr ound s y stem differ ent from Dolb y Digital that has become a popular surr ound sound format for mo vies. Dynamic r ange The difference be t w een the quiet est and loudest sounds possible in an audio signal (without dist or ting or get ting lost in noise). Dolby Digit al and D TS soundtr acks are capable of a v ery wide dynamic r ange, delivering dr amatic cinema-lik e effects. File e xt ension A tag added t o the end of a filename to indica t e the t ype of file. F or e xample, âÂÂ.mp3â indica t es an MP3 file. Gr oup (D VD-Audio only) A collection of tr acks on a D VD-Audio disc. Equivalent t o a D VD- Video title. See also T itle and T r ack . Int erlaced video A method of displa ying a pictur e in which odd- number ed lines are upda t ed in one pass, then e ven-number ed lines updat ed in the next. See also Pr ogressiv e scan video . MP3 MP3 (MPEG1 audio la yer 3) is a compr essed audio file format. File s are r ecognized by their file ext ension âÂÂ.mp3â or âÂÂ.MP3â . MPEG audio An audio format used on Super VCDs/V ideo CDs and some D VD discs. This unit can conv ert MPEG audio t o PCM format for wider compa t - ibilit y with digital r ecorder s and A V amplifier s. See also PCM . Glossar y Analog audio An electrical signal that dir ectly repr esents sound. Compar e this t o digital audio which can be an electrical signal, but is an indir ect repr esent ation of sound. See also Digital audio . Aspect ra tio The width of a TV scr een r elativ e to it s height. Conv entional TVs are 4:3 (in other w ords, the screen is almost squar e); widescr een models are 1 6:9 (the scr een is almost t wice as wide a s it is high). Bonus Gr oup (D VD-Audio only) An âÂÂe xtr aâ group on some D VD-Audio discs that requir es a k ey number t o access. See also Group . Br o w sable pic tur es (D VD-Audio only) A featur e of some D VD-Audio discs in which the user can bro w se still picture s recor ded on the disc a s the audio is pla yed. See also Slide show . Chapt er (D VD- V ideo, D VD-R W) Just as a book is split up int o sev er al chapt ers, a title on a D VD disc is usually divided int o chapt ers. See also T itle . Digital audio An indirect r epr esent ation of sound b y num- ber s. During r ecor ding, the sound is measur ed at discr et e int ervals (4 4,1 00 times a second for CD audio) b y an analog -t o-digital con vert er , gener ating a str eam of number s. On pla yback, a digit al-t o-analog con v erter gener at es an analog signal based on the se number s. See also Sampling frequenc y and Analog audio . Dolb y Digital 1 Using a maximum of 5.1 channels of audio, this high qualit y surround s y st em is used in many of the finer movie thea ter s around the w orld.
61 En 8 Additional Informa tion Pur eCinema (D VD- Video onl y) V ideo on a D VD discs ma y be either video mat erial (originally shot on video) or film mat erial (originally shot on film). V ideo mat erial has a fr ame r at e of 3 0 fr ames/sec.(NTSC), compar ed with 2 4 fr ames/sec. for film. This pla yer conv erts film mat erial t o 6 0 fr ames/sec. (in progr essiv e scan mode). Pur eCinema adjusts the picture so tha t it ma tches mor e closely the pictur e qualit y of a cinema screen. Y ou can see whether video on a D VD disc is film or video mat erial b y displa ying the video tr ansmission r at e (see page 3 4 ). If a hash mark (#) appear s abo ve the tr ansmission r a t e displa y , it is film mat erial. R egions (D VD- V ideo only) These associa te discs and pla y ers with particular area s of the w orld. This unit will only pla y discs that ha ve compa tible region code s. Y ou can find the r egion code of y our unit b y looking on the rear panel. Some discs ar e compatible with mor e than one region (or all r egions). Sampling fr equency The r at e at which sound is measur ed t o be turned int o digit al audio dat a. The higher the r at e, the bet ter the sound qualit y , but the more digit al information is gener at ed. St andar d CD audio has a sampling fr equency of 4 4.1kHz, which means 4 4,1 00 samples (mea sur ements) per second. See also Digital audio . Slidesho w (D VD, Super VCD/V ideo CD) A featur e of some D VD discs in which still pictur es r ecorded on the disc cy cle aut omati- cally as the audio is pla yed. See also Bro wsable picture s . T itle (D VD- V ideo only) A collection of chapt ers on a D VD- Video disc. Equivalent t o a D VD-Audio gr oup. See also Chapter and Gr oup . T r ack Audio CDs, Super VCDs/V ideo CDs and D VD- Audio discs all use tr acks to divide up the cont ent of a disc. The D VD-V ideo equivalent is called a chapt er . See also Chapter and Gr oup . MPEG video The video format used for Super VCDs/V ideo CDs and D VDs. Super VCDs/V ideo CDs uses the older MPEG-1 st andar d, while D VD uses the ne w er and much bet ter qualit y MPEG-2 stan- dar d. Multi-session A CD-R/R W that cont ains t wo or mor e âÂÂses- sionsâ . Each session is a complet e recor ding pr ocess, so each session is read a s a complet e disc. This pla yer can only r ead the fir st session on a disc. Optical digit al output A jack that output s digit al audio in the form of light pulses. Connect component s with optical digit al jacks using a special optical cor d, a vailable fr om good audio dealer s. P ack ed PCM (D VD-Audio only) A lossless compr ession s y st em that enables mor e PCM audio t o be stor ed on a D VD-Audio disc than w ould otherwise be possible. PCM (Pulse Code Modula tion) The most common s yst em of encoding digital audio, found on CDs and D A T . Ex cellent qualit y , but requir es a lot of dat a compared t o formats such as Dolb y Digital and MPEG audio. F or compatibilit y with digital audio r ecorder s (CD, MD and D A T) and A V amplifiers with digit al inputs, this unit can con vert Dolb y Digit al, D TS and MPEG audio t o PCM. See also Digital audio . PBC (Pla yBack Contr ol) (Super VCD/V ideo CD only) A s y st em of na vigating a Super VCD/V ideo CD thr ough on-scr een menus recor ded ont o the disc. Especially good for discs tha t you would normally no t w atch fr om beginning t o end all at onceâÂÂk ar aoke discs, for e xample. Pr ogr essive scan video Also called non-int erlaced video, this method of displa ying a picture upda t es all the lines in one pass, r esulting in a mor e st able, flick er -fr ee image than int erlaced video (for a given scanning r at e). See also Interlaced video .
62 En Additional Informa tion 8 Picture pla yback stops and the oper ation but t ons cannot be used. ⢠Pr ess 7 , then start playback again ( 3). ⢠Switch the po wer off once, unplug fr om the wall sock et, then plug back in and switch on again using the fr ont panel ST ANDB Y/ON . Ne w set tings made in the Setup screen menus while a disc is pla ying ar e ineffective. ⢠Some set tings can be changed while a disc is playing, but ar e not effectiv e until the disc is stopped then re start ed. This is not a malfunction. Mak e the same set ting when the pla yer is st opped. Pr ess 7 , then rest art pla yback ( 3). Not e tha t making set tings in the Setup scr een men us ma y cancel the RESUME function. Set tings are canceled. ⢠When the po wer is cut due t o pow er failure or b y unplugging the pow er cor d, set tings will be canceled. Pr ess S T ANDB Y/ON on the fr ont panel t o turn the pla yer off . W ait for âÂÂ--OFF--â t o disappear from the displa y , then unplug the pow er cord. No picture/No color . ⢠Incorr ect video connections. Check that connections ar e correct and that plugs ar e inserted full y . ⢠TV/monit or or AV amplifier se t tings are incorr ect. Check the instruction manual of the connect ed equipment. ⢠The Component V ideo menu is set t o Progr essiv e but y our TV/monit or is no t compatible with pr ogr essiv e scan. R econnect the pla yer t o your TV using a composit e or S- Video cord and set the TV to the appr opriat e input. No w choose the Int erlace set ting in the Component V ideo menu, then switch the TV input back t o the component input. ( page 4 8 ). R eset the pla yer ( page 6 5 ). Component V ideo will be r eset t o Int erlace but y ouâÂÂll also loose other set tings. Scr een is stretched or aspect does not change. ⢠The TV Screen set ting in the Setup menu is incorr ect. Set the TV Scr een option to ma tch the TV/monitor y ou're using ( page 4 7 ). T r ouble shooting Incorr ect oper ation is often mist aken for trouble or malfunction. If you think that ther e is something wrong with this component, check the points below . Sometimes the tr ouble may lie in another component. Inspect the other components and electrical appliances being used. If the trouble cannot be r ectified after checking the items belo w , ask your near est Pioneer authorized service cent er or your dealer to carry out r epair work. The disc is ejected aut omatically after loading. ⢠Dirt y or damaged disc. See page 5 8 for disc car e information. ⢠Disc not sea t ed pr operly in the disc guide. Align the disc pr operly . ⢠Incompatible r egion number . If the r egion number on a D VD- Video disc doe s not match the number on the pla yer , the disc cannot be used ( page 9 ). ⢠Condensation inside the pla yer . Allo w time for condensation t o ev apor at e. Avoid using the pla yer near an air -conditioning unit. Pla yback is not possible. ⢠Disc is loaded upside do wn. R eload the disc with the label side face up. ⢠A Super VCD that does no t conform with the IEC standar ds might not pla y normally . Cannot pla y D VD-RW disc ⢠If the displa y shows âÂÂCOPY PR O TECT PROGR AM, UNPLA Y ABLEâ , this means that this disc canno t be pla yed. D VD-Audio pla yback st ops. ⢠The disc ma y hav e been illegally copied. mark appear s on screen. ⢠The oper ation is pr ohibit ed b y the play er . mark appear s on screen. ⢠The select ed function does no t oper at e for that disc. When making changes in the Se tup OSD menus, is displa yed. ⢠There is a CD or Super VCD/V ideo CD loaded and the set ting that w as changed applie s only t o D VD discs. The set tings will tak e effect next time a D VD is loaded.
63 En 8 Additional Informa tion Scr een is suddenly stre tched when the Setup scr een is opened. ⢠If the Setup scr een is opened during playback of a D VD being view ed in the let ter bo x format, the scr een ma y switch t o the wide screen format. This is not a malfunction. The scr een will return t o normal when the Setup scr een is closed. Picture disturbance during pla yback or dark. ⢠This pla yer is compatible with Macro- Vision Sy stem cop y guard. Some discs include a cop y prev ention signal, and when this t ype of disc is pla yed back, stripes e tc., ma y appear on some sections of the pictur e depending on the TV . This is not a malfunction. ⢠The TV s y st em ma y be set inappr opriat ely . See Setting the TV Sy stem on page 1 6 . ⢠Discs r espond differ ently t o particular pla y er functions. This ma y result in the scr een becoming black for a brief inst ant or shaking slightly when the function is e xecut ed. These pr oblems are lar gely due t o differences bet ween discs and disc cont ent and are no t malfunctions of this pla yer . ⢠When using pr ogr essiv e-scan. If your TV is connect ed using the COMPONENT VIDEO OUT jacks, set the Component V ideo menu t o Interlace ( page 4 8 ). When r ecorded on a VCR or passed thr ough an A V selec t or , ther e is disturbance in the pla yback picture. ⢠Due t o the pla yerâ s cop y pro tection cir cuits, connec- tion of this de vice through a VCR or an A V select or ma y pr ev ent r ecording or cause pictur e problems. This is not a malfunction. Some set tings in the Setup Menu do not appear . The Setup Menu Mode is se t t o Basic ; set it to Expert ( page 3 9 ). The r emot e control doesn't seem t o work. ⢠The CONTR OL IN jack on the rear panel is connect ed. Use the r emot e control of the connect ed compo- nent t o control this pla yer . ⢠The remo t e control is t oo far from the pla yer , or the angle with the r emot e sensor is too wide. Use the r emot e within its oper ating r ange ( page 7 ). ⢠The bat t eries ar e exhaust ed. Put in new ba t t eries ( page 7 ). Cannot list en t o high-sampling r at e audio thr ough the digital output. ⢠Linear PCM Out is set t o Down Sample On . Set t o Do wn Sample Off . ⢠As a cop y-pr ot ection measur e, some D VDs do not output 9 6 kHz audio. In this case, e v en if Do wn Sample Off is select ed, the pla yer aut oma tically output s the audio at 4 8 kHz. This is not a malfunction. No audio, or audio is dist or t ed. ⢠Some D VD discs do not output digit al audio. Switch your amplifier t o the pla yer's analog outputs. ⢠Dir t, dust, etc. on the disc. Clean the disc ( page 5 8 ). ⢠Inter connects are no t fully inserted int o the terminals (or ar e not connect ed). Check that all int erconnect s are firml y insert ed. ⢠Dir t y or oxidized plugs/t erminals. Clean the plugs/t erminals. ⢠Incorrect audio cable connection. Check the audio connections ( page s 1 0-1 2 ). ⢠Play er's output is connected t o the amplifier's phono (turnt able) inputs. Connect t o any set of input s except phono. ⢠The disc is paused. Pr ess 3 or 8 t o e xit the pause mode. ⢠Incorrect amplifier set tings. Check that the v olume is turned up, that the speak ers ar e on, the input function set corr ectly , etc. ⢠The Audio Out set ting is incorr ect. If ther e is no dialog fr om the fr ont L/R speaker s, set Audio Out t o 2 Channel. If there is no output fr om the rear , cent er and subwoofer speak ers, se t Audio Out t o 5.1 Channel ( page 4 3 ). ⢠The play er is set t o 5.1ch pla yback, but sound is onl y 2ch. Check that 2ch pla yback is not select ed in the discâ s menu. The analog audio is OK, but ther e appear s to be no digital audio signal. ⢠Incorrect Audio 1 menu se t tings. Make sur e that the Digital Out set ting is set t o On ( page 4 2 ). Check that the Dolb y Digital and DT S set tings are suit able for y our amplifierâÂÂcheck the amp's instruction manual.
64 En Additional Informa tion 8 The disc containing the MP3 tr acks wonâÂÂt pla y . ⢠If the disc is a recor dable CD, mak e sure that the disc is finalized. If the message âÂÂUNPLA Y ABLE MP3 FORMA Tâ is displa yed when y ou try to pla y a disc/ tr ack: Check that the tr ack(s) are in the MPEG1 Audio La yer 3 format. Check that the sampling r at e of the tr ack(s) are 4 4.1 or 4 8kHz. Some MP3 tr acks appear t o be missing fr om a disc. ⢠If a tr ack name does not end in âÂÂ.mp3â or âÂÂ.MP3â , this pla yer will not r ecognize it as an MP3 tr ack. ⢠This play er only r ecognizes the fir st 2 5 0 folders and tr acks on a disc. If there ar e more folder s/tr acks than this, y ou will not be able t o play them. ⢠This play er is not compatible with multi-session discs. If the disc is multi-session, y ou will only be able t o pla y tr acks r ecorded ont o the first se ssion. The audio r ecorded on the disc is not output pr operly . ⢠If the audio is switched t o [2] when playing a Super VCD that cont ains only one st er eo soundtr ack, there ma y be no sound at all. T o re st ore the sound, r eturn the A UDIO but t on back t o its original position ( page 26 ). Canâ t perform fr ame sear ch, or the frame number is not displa yed ⢠Check that the F rame Sear ch option is set t o On ( page 4 7 ). ⢠Y ou can only use fr ame search with D VD-V ideo discs. ⢠Fr ame numbers ar e only displa yed with D VD- Video discs, and only when the disc is paused or during fr ame advance/r ev er se. F r ame search doesnâÂÂt find the frame number input, or some fr ames ar e skipped when using fr ame advance. ⢠Y ou ma y experience this with discs r ecorded in 2 4 fr ames/second pr ogre ssive scan format. W ith these discs, the pla yer âÂÂmissesâ one fr ame every six fr ames. F or this r eason, the fr ame number s do not appear continuous when using fr ame advance, and it ma y not be possible t o displa y the ex act fr ame you sear ched for . The pla yer does no t actually dr op an y fr ames tha t ar e recor ded on the disc, how ev er . Noticeable differ ence in D VD and CD volume. ⢠D VDs and CDs use differ ent recording me thods. This is not a malfunction. Cannot pla y multi-channel audio ⢠Make sur e that 5.1 Channel is select ed in the Audio Out menu (page 4 3 ). ⢠Check that the set tings in the Speak er Set ting scr een ar e correct ( page 4 4 ). ⢠Check the audio options a v ailable from the discâ s menu. No digital audio output ⢠Check that Digital Out se t ting is set t o On ( page 42 ). ⢠Some D VD-Audio discs pr ohibit digital audio output. ⢠No digital audio is output when pla ying SA CDs. Cannot output 1 9 2kHz or 1 7 6.4kHz digital audio. The pla yer does no t output digital audio at these sampling r at es. Cannot output 96kHz or 8 8.2kHz digital audio. ⢠Check that the Linear PCM set ting is not set t o Down Sample On ( page 4 1 ). ⢠Some discs are digit al cop y prot ected and do no t output high sampling r at e digit al audio. No D TS audio output. ⢠If this unit is connected t o a non-D TS compaible amplifier or decoder using a digital audio cable, se t D TS Out t o DTS 3 PCM in the Setup menu. If y ou do not do this, noise will be output if y ou try and pla y a D TS disc. ⢠If this unit is connected t o a D TS-compatible amplifier or decoder using a digit al audio cable, check the amplifier set tings, and that the cable is pr operl y connect ed. Audio mix does not sound right or sounds incomplet e (for e xample, inaudible dialog). ⢠Incorrect Setup men u set tings. Make sur e that 2 Channel output is select ed for the Audio Out menu option if y ou've connect ed t o the st ereo inputs on y our amplifier or TV ( page 43 ). ⢠If the power is switched off befor e exiting the Setup menu, the set tings ar e not st ored. Make sur e that y ou e xit the Setup menu aft er changing an y set tings before switching off .
65 En 8 Additional Informa tion R e set ting the Play er Re set ting the play er re turns all menu, pictur e and passw ord se t tings to their fact ory defaults. 1 Switch the play er into st andby using the front panel ST ANDB Y/ON. 2 Hold down the fr ont panel 7 but t on and switch back on. All set tings will ha v e been cleared. Not e St atic electricit y or other e xt ernal influences ma y cause malfunctioning of this unit. In this case, unplug the po w er cord and then plug back in. This will usually r eset the unit for proper oper ation. If this does no t corr ect the problem, plea se consult y our near est Pioneer service cent er .
66 En Additional Informa tion 8 Country Input -Code Country-code AR GENTINA A USTR ALIA A USTRIA BEL GIUM BRAZIL CANAD A CHILE CHINA DENMARK FINLAND FRANCE GERMANY HONG K ONG INDIA INDONESIA IT AL Y JAP AN K OREA, REPUBLIC OF MALA Y SIA MEXICO NETHERLANDS NEW ZEALAND NOR W A Y P AKIST AN PHILIPPINES POR TUG AL R USSIAN FEDERA T ON SING APORE SP AIN SWITZERLAND SWEDEN T AIW AN, PR OVINCE OF CHINA THAILAND UNITED KINGDOM UNITED ST A TES OF AMERICA 01 1 8 01 21 01 2 0 0205 02 1 8 030 1 03 1 2 03 1 4 04 1 1 0609 06 1 8 04 05 08 1 1 09 1 4 0904 0 920 10 1 6 111 8 13 2 5 1 324 14 12 14 2 6 14 15 16 1 1 16 0 8 16 2 0 18 2 1 19 0 7 05 1 9 030 8 19 0 5 202 3 20 08 0702 21 1 9 ar au at be br ca cl cn dk fi fr de hk in id it jp kr my mx nl nz no pk ph pt ru sg es ch se tw th gb us Country Code List Language code list Language Code Japanese/japonais ( ja ) 1 00 1 English/anglais ( en ) 0 5 1 4 Fr ench ( fr) 0 6 1 8 German ( de ) 0 4 0 5 Italian ( it ) 0 9 2 0 Spanish ( es ) 0 5 1 9 Dutch ( nl ) 1 4 1 2 R ussian ( ru ) 1 8 2 1 Chinese ( zh ) 2 6 0 8 K orean ( k o ) 1 1 1 5 Greek ( el ) 0 5 1 2 Afar ( aa ) 0 1 0 1 Abkhazian ( ab ) 0 1 0 2 Afrikaans ( af ) 0 1 0 6 Amharic ( am ) 0 1 1 3 Ar abic ( ar ) 0 1 1 8 Assamese ( a s ) 0 1 1 9 Aymar a ( ay ) 0 1 2 5 Azerbaijani ( az ) 0 1 2 6 Bashkir ( ba ) 0 2 0 1 Byelorussian ( be ) 0 2 0 5 Bulgarian ( bg ) 0 2 0 7 Bihari ( bh ) 0 2 0 8 Bislama ( bi ) 0 2 0 9 Bengali ( bn ) 0 2 1 4 T ibet an ( bo ) 0 2 1 5 Bre ton ( br ) 0 2 1 8 Cat alan ( ca ) 0 3 0 1 Corsican ( co ) 0 3 1 5 Czech ( cs ) 0 3 1 9 W elsh ( cy ) 0 3 2 5 Danish ( da ) 04 0 1 Bhut ani ( dz ) 04 2 6 Esper anto ( eo ) 0 5 1 5 Est onian ( et ) 0 5 2 0 Basque ( eu ) 0 5 2 1 P ersian ( fa ) 0 60 1 Finnish ( fi ) 0 60 9 Fiji ( fj ) 0 6 1 0 F aroese ( fo ) 0 6 1 5 Frisian ( fy ) 0 6 2 5 Irish ( ga ) 0 7 0 1 Scots-Gaelic ( gd ) 0 7 04 Galician ( gl ) 0 7 1 2 Guar ani ( gn ) 0 7 1 4 Gujar ati ( gu ) 0 7 2 1
67 En 8 Additional Informa tion Language Code Hausa ( ha ) 0 8 0 1 Hindi ( hi ) 0 8 09 Croa tian (hr ) 0 8 1 8 Hungarian ( hu ) 0 8 2 1 Armenian ( h y ) 08 2 5 Int erlingua ( ia ) 0 9 0 1 Int erlingue ( ie ) 0 9 0 5 Inupiak ( ik ) 0 9 1 1 Indonesian ( in ) 0 9 1 4 Icelandic ( is ) 09 1 9 Hebre w ( iw ) 0 9 2 3 Y iddish ( ji ) 1 009 Ja vanese ( jw ) 1 02 3 Geor gian ( ka ) 1 1 0 1 Kazakh ( kk ) 1 1 1 1 Greenlandic ( kl ) 1 1 1 2 Cambodian ( km ) 1 1 1 3 Kannada ( kn ) 1 1 1 4 Ka shmiri ( ks ) 1 1 1 9 Kur dish ( ku ) 1 1 2 1 Kirghiz ( k y ) 1 1 2 5 Latin ( la ) 1 2 0 1 Lingala (ln ) 1 2 1 4 Laothian ( lo ) 1 2 1 5 Lithuanian ( lt ) 1 2 2 0 Latvian ( lv ) 1 2 2 2 Malagas y ( mg ) 1 3 0 7 Maori ( mi ) 1 3 0 9 Macedonian ( mk ) 1 3 1 1 Mala yalam ( ml ) 1 3 1 2 Mongolian ( mn ) 1 3 1 4 Moldavian ( mo ) 1 3 1 5 Mar athi ( mr ) 1 3 1 8 Mala y ( ms ) 1 3 1 9 Malt ese ( mt ) 1 3 2 0 Burmese ( m y ) 1 3 2 5 Nauru ( na ) 1 4 0 1 Nepali ( ne ) 1 4 0 5 Norwegian ( no ) 1 4 1 5 Occitan ( oc ) 1 5 0 3 Oromo ( om ) 1 5 1 3 Oriy a ( or ) 1 5 1 8 P anjabi ( pa ) 1 6 0 1 P olish ( pl ) 1 6 1 2 P asht o, Pushto ( ps ) 1 6 1 9 P ortuguese ( pt ) 1 6 2 0 Language Code Quechua ( qu ) 1 7 2 1 Rhaet o-Romanc e ( rm ) 1 8 1 3 Kirundi ( rn ) 1 8 1 4 R omanian ( r o ) 1 8 1 5 Kin y arw anda ( rw ) 1 8 2 3 Sanskrit ( sa ) 1 9 0 1 Sindhi ( sd ) 1 9 04 Sangho ( sg ) 1 9 0 7 Serbo-Cr oatian ( sh ) 1 90 8 Singhalese ( si ) 1 90 9 Slov ak ( sk ) 1 9 1 1 Slov enian ( sl ) 1 9 1 2 Samoan ( sm ) 1 9 1 3 Shona ( sn ) 1 9 1 4 Somali ( so ) 1 9 1 5 Albanian ( sq ) 1 9 1 7 Serbian ( sr ) 1 9 1 8 Siswa ti ( ss ) 1 9 1 9 Seso tho ( st ) 1 9 2 0 Sundanese ( su ) 1 9 2 1 Swedish ( sv ) 1 9 2 2 Swahili ( sw ) 1 9 2 3 T amil ( t a ) 2 00 1 T elugu ( t e ) 2 00 5 T ajik ( tg ) 2 00 7 Thai ( th ) 2 008 T igriny a ( ti ) 2 009 T urkmen ( tk ) 2 0 1 1 T agalog ( tl ) 2 0 1 2 Set swana ( tn ) 2 0 1 4 T onga ( t o ) 2 0 1 5 T urkish ( tr ) 2 0 1 8 T songa ( ts ) 2 0 1 9 T a t ar ( t t ) 2 02 0 T wi ( tw ) 2 0 2 3 Ukr ainian ( uk ) 2 1 1 1 Ur du ( ur ) 2 1 1 8 Uzbek ( uz ) 2 1 2 6 V ietnamese ( vi ) 2 2 0 9 V olapük ( vo ) 2 2 1 5 W olof ( wo ) 2 3 1 5 Xhosa ( xh ) 2 4 0 8 Y oruba ( yo ) 2 5 1 5 Zulu ( zu ) 2 6 2 1
68 En Additional Informa tion 8 When vie wing on a standar d TV or monit or 16:9 4:3 4:3 (Letter Box) 4:3 (Pan & Scan) The picture is shown in widescreen with black bars at the top and bottom of the screen. The sides of the picture are cropped so that the picture fills the whole screen. Screen format of disc Setting Appearance 16:9 (Wide) 4:3 (Letter Box) 4:3 (Pan & Scan) The picture is presented correctly on any setting. When vie wing on a widescr een TV or monit or 16:9 (Wide) The picture is presented in widescreen. 16:9 (Wide) 16:9 The picture is presented with black bars either side. Screen format of disc TV Setting Appearance 4:3 16:9 (Wide) Player Setting Full Normal Full Normal 4:3 16:9 (Compressed) (This setting only has any effect with progressive output.) Full The picture is squashed. Set to either Pan & Scan or Letter Box. The picture is squashed. Set your TV to âÂÂFullâÂÂ. The picture is stretched. Set your TV to âÂÂNormalâÂÂ. Choose this setting if you have a progressive scan-compatible TV and the aspect ratio cannot be changed. The picture is presented with black bars either side.
69 En 8 Additional Informa tion Specifications General Sy stem ... D VD- V ideo, D VD-Audio, D VD-R/R W , Super VCD, Video- CD, SA CD, CD and MP3 files P ow er requir ements D V - 4 7A ............................................................... 1 2 0 V , 60 Hz DV-73 3 A T aiwanese model ............................................ 1 1 0 V , 60 Hz Other models .............................. 2 2 0-2 4 0 V , 5 0/60 Hz P ower consumption .............................................................. 1 4 W P ow er consumption in st andb y mode D V - 4 7A ............................................................................ 0.3 W DV-73 3 A T aiwanese model ....................................................... 0.3 W Other models ............................................................. 0.5 W W eight D V - 4 7 A ..................................................... 4.2 kg (9 lb 4 oz) D V - 7 3 3A ........................................................................ 4.5 kg Dimensions D V -4 7A ....................... 4 2 0 (W) x 2 7 7 (D) x 9 7 .5 (H) mm (16 9 / 16 (W) x 10 15 / 16 (D) x 3 7 / 8 (H) in.) D V -7 3 3A .................... 4 2 0 (W) x 2 7 8 (D) x 9 7 .5 (H) mm Oper ating t empera ture ...... 5ðC to 3 5ðC ( 3 6ðF to 9 6ðF) Oper ating humidit y .............. 5% t o 85% (no condensa tion) S- V ideo output (2 individual outputs) Y (luminance) - Output lev el ............................. 1 Vp-p (7 5 â¦) C (color) - Output lev el ............................. 2 8 6 mVp-p (7 5 â¦) Jacks ........................................................................... S- VIDEO jack Video output (2 individual output s) Output lev el .......................................................... 1 Vp-p (7 5 â¦) Jacks ................................................................................... R CA jack Component video output (Y , P B , P R ) Output level ................................................ Y: 1.0 Vp-p (75 ⦠) P B , P R : 0.7 Vp-p (75 ⦠) Jacks ................................................................................. RCA jacks D1/D2 video output (D V -S7 3 3A only) Output level .................................................. Y: 1.0 Vp-p (75 â¦) P B , P R : 0.7 Vp-p (75 ⦠) Jacks ................................................................................ D terminal Audio output (2 pairs) Output lev el During audio output ................. 2 00 mV rms (1 kHz, âÂÂ2 0 dB) Number of channels ..................................................................... 2 Jacks ................................................................................... R CA jack Audio output (multi-channel / L, R, C, SW , LS, RS) Output lev el During audio output ................. 2 00 mV rms (1 kHz, âÂÂ2 0 dB) Number of channels ..................................................................... 6 Jacks ................................................................................... R CA jack Digital audio char ac t eristics Fr equency response .......... 4 Hz t o 44 kHz (D VD fs: 96 kHz) 4 Hz t o 8 8 kHz (D VD-Audio fs: 1 9 2 kHz) S/N r atio ............................................................................... 1 1 8 dB Dynamic r ange .................................................................... 1 08 dB T otal harmonic dist ortion .............................................. 0.00 1 % W ow and flut t er . Limit of measurement ( ñ 0.00 1% W . PEAK) or low er Digital output Optical digit al output .................................. Optical digit al jack Coaxial digital output .................................................... R CA jack Other t erminals Control in ............................................................ Minijack (3.5 ø) Control out ......................................................... Minijack (3.5 ø) Accessories Audio cable .................................................................................... 1 Video cable ..................................................................................... 1 Remo t e control unit ..................................................................... 1 â AA â size (R6P) bat teries ............................................................. 2 P ow er cord ...................................................................................... 1 Oper ating Instructions Note: The specifications and de sign of this product ar e subject to change without notice, due to impr ov ement.
70 En Additional Informa tion 8 We Want You LISTENING For A Lifetime Selecting fine audio equipment such as the unit youâÂÂve just purchased is only the start of your musical enjoyment. Now itâÂÂs time to consider how you can maximize the fun and excitement your equipment offers. This manufacturer and the Electronic Industries AssociationâÂÂs Consumer Electronics Group want you to get the most out of your equipment by playing it at a safe level. One that lets the sound come through loud and clear without annoying blaring or distortion-and, most importantly, without affecting your sensitive hearing. Sound can be deceiving. Over time your hearing âÂÂcomfort levelâ adapts to higher volumes of sound. So what sounds âÂÂnormalâ can actually be loud and harmful to your hearing. Guard against this by setting your equipment at a safe level BEFORE your hearing adapts. To establish a safe level: ⢠Start your volume control at a low setting. ⢠Slowly increase the sound until you can hear it comfortably and clearly, and without distortion. Once you have established a comfortable sound level: ⢠Set the dial and leave it there. Taking a minute to do this now will help to prevent hearing damage or loss in the future. After all, we want you listening for a lifetime. W e W ant Y ou Listening For A Lifetime Used wisely, your new sound equipment will provide a lifetime of fun and enjoyment. Since hearing damage from loud noise is often undetectable until it is too late, this manufacturer and the Electronic Industries AssociationâÂÂs Consumer Electronics Group recommend you avoid prolonged exposure to excessive noise. This list of sound levels is included for your protection. Decibel Level Example 30 Quiet library, soft whispers 40 Living room, refrigerator, bedroom away from traffic 50 Light traffic, normal conversation, quiet office 60 Air conditioner at 20 feet, sewing machine 70 Vacuum cleaner, hair dryer, noisy restaurant 80 Average city traffic, garbage disposals, alarm clock at two feet. THE FOLLOWING NOISES CAN BE DANGEROUS UNDER CONSTANT EXPOSURE 90 Subway, motorcycle, truck traffic, lawn mower 100 Garbage truck, chain saw, pneumatic drill 120 Rock band concert in front of speakers, thunderclap 140 Gunshot blast, jet plane 180 Rocket launching pad Information courtesy of the Deafness Research Foundation. We Want You LISTENING For A Lifetime EST 1924 EIA E L E C T R O N I C I N D U S T R I E S ⢠A S S O C I A T I O N ⢠EST 1924 EIA E L E C T R O N I C I N D U S T R I E S ⢠A S S O C I A T I O N â¢
71 En 8 Additional Informa tion
Printed in <VRB1278-A> <TWKZW/01J00000> Published by Pioneer Corporation. Copyright é 2001 Pioneer Corporation. All rights reserved. PIONEER CORPORATION 4-1, Meguro 1-Chome, Meguro-ku, Tokyo 153-8654, Japan PIONEER ELECTRONICS [USA] INC. P.O. BOX 1540, Long Beach, California 90801-1540, U.S.A. PIONEER ELECTRONICS OF CANADA, INC. 300 Allstate Parkway, Markham, Ontario L3R OP2, Canada PIONEER EUROPE NV Haven 1087, Keetberglaan 1, B-9120 Melsele, Belgium TEL: 03/570.05.11 PIONEER ELECTRONICS AUSTRALIA PTY. LTD. 178-184 Boundary Road, Braeside, Victoria 3195, Australia, TEL: [03] 9586-6300 PIONEER ELECTRONICS DE MEXICO S.A. DE C.V. San Lorenzo 1009 3er Piso Desp. 302 Col. Del Valle Mexico D.F. C.P. 03100 TEL: 5-688-52-90